WO2015016041A1 - Color filter, production method therefor, colored curable composition, solid state imaging element, and colored curable composition and kit - Google Patents

Color filter, production method therefor, colored curable composition, solid state imaging element, and colored curable composition and kit Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015016041A1
WO2015016041A1 PCT/JP2014/068565 JP2014068565W WO2015016041A1 WO 2015016041 A1 WO2015016041 A1 WO 2015016041A1 JP 2014068565 W JP2014068565 W JP 2014068565W WO 2015016041 A1 WO2015016041 A1 WO 2015016041A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
colored
curable composition
colored curable
group
pixel
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/068565
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
和也 尾田
恭平 荒山
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to KR1020177030996A priority Critical patent/KR101949774B1/en
Priority to KR1020157034956A priority patent/KR20160005778A/en
Publication of WO2015016041A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015016041A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/201Filters in the form of arrays
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/133509Filters, e.g. light shielding masks
    • G02F1/133514Colour filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/133509Filters, e.g. light shielding masks
    • G02F1/133514Colour filters
    • G02F1/133516Methods for their manufacture, e.g. printing, electro-deposition or photolithography
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/0005Production of optical devices or components in so far as characterised by the lithographic processes or materials used therefor
    • G03F7/0007Filters, e.g. additive colour filters; Components for display devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/0047Photosensitive materials characterised by additives for obtaining a metallic or ceramic pattern, e.g. by firing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/105Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having substances, e.g. indicators, for forming visible images
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L27/00Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
    • H01L27/14Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation
    • H01L27/144Devices controlled by radiation
    • H01L27/146Imager structures
    • H01L27/14601Structural or functional details thereof
    • H01L27/1462Coatings
    • H01L27/14621Colour filter arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L27/00Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
    • H01L27/14Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation
    • H01L27/144Devices controlled by radiation
    • H01L27/146Imager structures
    • H01L27/14683Processes or apparatus peculiar to the manufacture or treatment of these devices or parts thereof
    • H01L27/14685Process for coatings or optical elements

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a color filter, a production method thereof, a colored curable composition, a solid-state imaging device, a colored curable composition, and a kit.
  • the color filter is an indispensable component for the display of a solid-state image sensor or liquid crystal display device.
  • a colored composition is employed (for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).
  • FIG. 13 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a conventional color filter manufacturing method, in which 200 is a color filter, 201 is a first colored pixel, 202 is a second colored pixel, 203 is a mask, Reference numeral 204 denotes a colored curable composition for forming a second colored pixel, and 205 denotes a residue of the second colored pixel.
  • a mask 203 having a predetermined pattern is formed.
  • the light irradiated through the first colored pixel 201 is reflected by the surface of the first colored pixel 201 without passing through the first colored pixel 201, and is reflected in a portion other than the portion that is to be irradiated with light in the colored curable composition 204. May be irradiated. As a result, an unnecessary curing reaction of the colored curable composition 204 occurs. As a result, a residue 205 of the colored curable composition 204 may be generated on the first colored pixel 201 and / or the second colored pixel 202 after the colored curable composition 204 is developed. all right.
  • This invention solves this problem, and it aims at providing the manufacturing method of the color filter which can suppress generation
  • the above problem can be solved by reducing the difference in refractive index between the colored curable compositions used in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel.
  • the above-mentioned problem has been solved by the following means ⁇ 1>, preferably ⁇ 2> to ⁇ 18>.
  • ⁇ 1> a support, a first colored pixel formed on the support, and a second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel, A color filter in which a difference in refractive index between a first colored pixel and a second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0.10 or less.
  • the first colored pixel or the second colored pixel includes at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more, ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>, wherein the inorganic particles and the resin are included in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel that have a smaller refractive index when the inorganic particles and the resin are not included.
  • Color filter is not included.
  • the first colored pixel or the second colored pixel contains inorganic particles
  • the color filter according to ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2> wherein the inorganic particles are included in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel that have a smaller refractive index when the inorganic particles and the resin are not included.
  • ⁇ 5> The color filter according to ⁇ 3>, wherein the phthalocyanine pigment is contained in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel having a smaller refractive index in a state where the inorganic particles and the resin are not included.
  • ⁇ 6> The color filter according to any one of ⁇ 3> to ⁇ 5>, which contains at least one of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide as inorganic particles.
  • ⁇ 7> forming a first colored pixel on the support using the first colored curable composition; Forming a second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel by photolithography using the second colored curable composition; Have The manufacturing method of a color filter whose difference in refractive index in wavelength 535nm of the 1st colored curable composition and the 2nd colored curable composition is 0.10 or less.
  • ⁇ 8> The method for producing a color filter according to ⁇ 7>, wherein at least one of the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition contains a phthalocyanine pigment.
  • the first colored curable composition or the second colored curable composition contains at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more, ⁇ 7>
  • the inorganic particles and the resin are included in the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition having a smaller refractive index in a state in which the inorganic particles and the resin are not included.
  • the phthalocyanine pigment is contained in the one having a smaller refractive index in the state containing no inorganic particles and the resin, ⁇ 9> The manufacturing method of the color filter of description.
  • the first colored curable composition contains at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more, and The refractive index of the first colored curable composition in a state containing inorganic particles and the resin is higher than the refractive index of the first colored curable composition in a state not containing inorganic particles and the resin by 0.05 or more, ⁇ 7> The method for producing a color filter according to any one of ⁇ 11>.
  • ⁇ 13> A color filter obtained by the method for producing a color filter according to any one of ⁇ 7> to ⁇ 12>.
  • ⁇ 14> A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6> and ⁇ 13>.
  • ⁇ 15> A solid-state imaging device having a color filter obtained by the method for producing a color filter according to any one of ⁇ 7> to ⁇ 12>.
  • ⁇ 16> a colored curable composition comprising a colorant and at least one of a resin having an inorganic particle and a refractive index of 1.60 or more, A colored curable composition, wherein the refractive index of the colored curable composition is 0.05 or more higher than the refractive index in a state in which the inorganic particles and the resin are not included.
  • the colored curable composition according to ⁇ 16> which contains at least one of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide as inorganic particles.
  • a first colored curable composition and a second colored curable composition A kit for producing a color filter, wherein a difference in refractive index between a first colored curable composition and a second colored curable composition at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0.10 or less.
  • FIG. 1 is a plan view schematically showing an example of the color filter of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a method for producing a color filter of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first colored layer.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which a photoresist layer is formed on the first colored layer.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which a resist pattern is formed on the first colored layer.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which a first colored pattern is formed by providing a removal portion group in the first colored layer by etching.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state where the resist pattern in FIG. 6 is removed.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which the second colored pattern and the second colored curable composition layer are formed.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which the second colored curable composition layer in FIG. 8 and a part of the second colored pixels constituting the second colored pattern have been removed.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which the third colored pattern and the third colored curable composition layer are formed.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which the third colored curable composition layer in FIG. 10 has been removed.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a configuration example of a color filter and a solid-state imaging device.
  • FIG. 13 is a plan view schematically showing an example of a conventional color filter manufacturing method.
  • the contents of the present invention will be described in detail.
  • the description of the constituent elements described below may be made based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
  • “to” is used in the sense of including the numerical values described before and after it as lower and upper limits.
  • the notation which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes what has a substituent with what does not have a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the “colored layer” means a pixel used for a color filter.
  • the pigment in this specification means, for example, an insoluble coloring compound that does not dissolve in a solvent.
  • the solvent includes the solvent exemplified in the solvent column described later. Therefore, the coloring compound which does not melt
  • a colored film formed on a substrate for example, a silicon substrate
  • a “colored radiation sensitive) layer” for example, a film formed on a substrate (for example, a silicon substrate) without dividing the region
  • the coloring formed by dividing the region into a pattern is referred to as a “colored pattern”.
  • a film for example, a film patterned in a stripe shape
  • a colored pattern is a component of a color filter that exists in a plurality of colored patterns.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the compound used in the present invention is defined as a polystyrene converted value by GPC measurement.
  • the weight average molecular weight is, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), TSKgel Super AWM-H (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 6.0 mm ID ⁇ 15.0 cm) as a column, and 10 mmol / L as an eluent. It can be determined by using a lithium bromide NMP (N-methylpyrrolidinone) solution.
  • the color filter of the present invention includes a substrate, a first colored pixel formed on the substrate, and a second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel, and the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel.
  • the difference in refractive index of the colored pixel at 535 nm is 0.10 or less.
  • the difference in refractive index at the wavelength 535 nm between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel in the color filter is 0.10 or less, thereby suppressing the generation of residue when forming the color filter. Can do.
  • the difference in refractive index between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is preferably 0.10 or less, more preferably 0.06 or less, and further preferably 0.02 or less. 0 is particularly preferable.
  • the refractive index of the first colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is preferably 1.58 to 1.85, and more preferably 1.58 to 1.83.
  • the refractive index of the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is not particularly limited as long as the difference in refractive index between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0.10 or less. .
  • the refractive index of the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm can be measured using, for example, an ellipsometer UVISEL / 460-FUV-AGAS (manufactured by Horiba, Ltd.).
  • the color filter of the present invention preferably includes, for example, at least a plurality of first colored pixels arranged two-dimensionally and a plurality of second colored pixels adjacent to the first colored pixels. It is more preferable to further have a plurality of third colored pixels adjacent to.
  • FIG. 1 is a plan view schematically showing an example of the color filter of the present invention.
  • the color filter 1 includes a first colored pixel 2, a second colored pixel 3, and a third colored pixel 6.
  • the color filter 1 includes a first colored pixel 2 formed in a checkered pattern, and a second colored pixel 3 and a third colored pixel 6 between the first colored pixels 2. It is preferable to be formed.
  • the 1st coloring pixel 2 is formed more than the 2nd coloring pixel 3 and the 3rd coloring pixel 6.
  • the first colored pixel 2 or the second colored pixel 3 contains at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more (hereinafter also referred to as “high refractive resin”), and includes inorganic particles and high refractive resin. Is preferably included in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel that have a smaller refractive index in a state where the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are not included. In particular, it is preferable that a phthalocyanine pigment is further included in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel that have a smaller refractive index in a state in which the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are not included.
  • the first coloring pixel is a green pixel
  • the second coloring pixel is a red pixel
  • the first pixel includes at least one of inorganic particles and a high refractive resin
  • the second coloring It is preferable that the pixel does not substantially contain inorganic particles and high refractive resin, and the difference in refractive index between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0.10 or less.
  • the first colored pixel is a blue pixel
  • the second colored pixel is a green pixel
  • the first pixel includes at least one of inorganic particles and a high refractive resin
  • the second colored pixel is inorganic particles and It is preferable that the refractive index difference between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is substantially 0.10 or less without substantially containing a high refractive resin.
  • the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin will be described in detail later.
  • the second colored pixel substantially does not contain inorganic particles and a high refractive resin.
  • the total amount of the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin in the second colored pixel is 1% by mass or less. That is, it is preferably 0% by mass.
  • the color filter 1 preferably has a thickness of 1.0 ⁇ m or less, and preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or less.
  • the thickness of the first colored pixel 2 and the second colored pixel 3 is preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or less, and preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or less.
  • the length of one side of the first colored pixel 2 and the second colored pixel 3 (the length of one side when the pixel is a rectangle, the length of one side when the pixel is a square) Is preferably from 1.0 to 0.4 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.8 to 0.4 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of image resolution.
  • the method for producing a color filter of the present invention includes a step of forming a first colored pixel on a support using a first colored curable composition, a first colored curable composition, and a first colored curable composition.
  • a step of forming a second colored pixel adjacent to the colored pixel by photolithography, and a difference in refractive index between the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0. 10 or less.
  • the difference in refractive index between the first colored pixel and the second colored curable composition is the difference in refractive index between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel, and the first colored curable property.
  • FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a method for producing a color filter of the present invention.
  • the color filter 1 includes a first colored pixel 2 and a second colored pixel 3 adjacent to the first colored pixel 2.
  • the second colored pixel having the predetermined pattern is formed. According to the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the generation of a residue of the second colored curable composition when forming the color filter 1.
  • the “residue of the second colored curable composition” means that the second colored curable composition is formed in addition to the desired portion.
  • the reason why the generation of the residue of the second colored curable composition is suppressed is estimated as follows. By reducing the refractive index difference between the first colored curable composition for forming the first colored pixel 2 and the second colored curable composition for forming the second colored pixel, When the second colored pixel 3 is formed, the light irradiated through the mask 4 is not reflected on the surface of the first colored pixel 2 without being transmitted to the first colored pixel 2.
  • the first colored pixel can be formed by dry etching or photolithography, and it is preferable to form the first colored pixel by dry etching.
  • the first colored layer 11 is formed from the first colored curable composition (step (A)).
  • the first colored layer 11 is preferably a green transmission layer. By making the first colored layer 11 a green transmissive layer, color sensitivity can be further improved. Details of the first colored curable composition will be described later.
  • the first colored layer 11 is formed by applying a first colored curable composition on a support by spin coating, slit coating, spray coating, spin coating, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, or the like. It can be formed by applying and drying. In particular, it is preferable to apply by spin coating.
  • the support is not particularly limited as long as it is used for a color filter in addition to a silicon substrate. Examples of the support include soda glass, borosilicate glass, quartz glass used for liquid crystal display elements and the like, and those obtained by attaching a transparent conductive film to these, and photoelectric conversion element substrates used for solid-state imaging elements, for example, oxidation Examples thereof include a film and silicon nitride.
  • the thickness of the first colored layer 11 after drying is preferably in the range of 0.3 to 1 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.8 ⁇ m, and still more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.7 ⁇ m.
  • the first colored curable composition contains a thermosetting compound
  • a heating device such as a hot plate or an oven.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 90 to 250 ° C, more preferably 100 to 230 ° C.
  • the heating time varies depending on the heating means, but is usually about 3 to 30 minutes when heated on a hot plate, and usually about 30 to 90 minutes when heated in an oven.
  • step (B) patterning is performed by dry etching so that the removed portion group 120 is formed in the first colored layer 11 (step (B)).
  • the first colored pattern 12 is formed.
  • the first colored layer 11 is formed from the first colored curable composition, and then the first colored layer 11 is exposed and developed to provide the removal portion group 120 as compared with the case where the removed portion group 120 is provided.
  • the removal portion group 120 having a desired shape (particularly rectangular shape) can be more reliably formed.
  • Dry etching can be performed on the first colored layer 11 using an etching gas with the patterned photoresist layer 51 as a mask. For example, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 4, first, a photoresist layer 51 is formed on the first colored layer 11.
  • a positive or negative colored curable composition (photoresist) is applied on the first colored layer 11 and dried to form the photoresist layer 51.
  • photoresist a positive or negative colored curable composition
  • a pre-bake treatment it is desirable to perform a heat treatment after exposure (PEB) and a heat treatment after development (post-bake treatment).
  • a positive colored curable composition is used as the photoresist.
  • positive type colored curable composition positive type photo sensitive to radiation such as ultraviolet rays (g rays, h rays, i rays), deep ultraviolet rays including excimer lasers, electron beams, ion beams and X rays.
  • a positive resist composition suitable for resist can be used.
  • the radiation g-line, h-line and i-line are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable.
  • the positive colored curable composition is preferably a composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin. Examples of the quinonediazide compound include a naphthoquinonediazide compound.
  • the thickness of the photoresist layer 51 after drying is preferably from 0.1 to 3 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.2 to 2.5 ⁇ m, still more preferably from 0.3 to 2 ⁇ m.
  • the application of the photoresist layer 51 can be suitably performed by using a method for applying the first colored curable composition in the first colored layer 11.
  • the photoresist layer 51 is exposed and developed to form a resist pattern (patterned photoresist layer) 52 provided with a resist removal group 51A.
  • the formation of the resist pattern 52 is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known photolithography technique can be used.
  • the resist pattern 52 is provided on the first colored layer 11 by providing the resist removal portion group 51 ⁇ / b> A in the photoresist layer 51 by exposure and development.
  • the resist pattern 52 functions as an etching mask for subsequent etching.
  • the exposure of the photoresist layer 51 can be performed by exposing with a g-line, h-line, i-line, etc., preferably i-line, through a predetermined mask pattern.
  • the photoresist is removed in accordance with the region where the colored pattern is to be formed by developing with a developer.
  • a developer Any developer can be used as long as it does not affect the first colored layer 11 and dissolves the exposed portion of the positive resist and the uncured portion of the negative resist.
  • the developer for example, a combination of various organic solvents or an alkaline aqueous solution can be used.
  • an alkaline aqueous solution an alkaline aqueous solution prepared by dissolving an alkaline compound so as to have a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass is suitable.
  • Alkaline compounds include, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropyl Examples thereof include ammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, trimethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene and the like.
  • alkaline aqueous solution is used as a developing solution, generally a washing process is performed with water after development.
  • the removal unit group 120 is provided in a checkered pattern on the first colored layer 11.
  • the removal unit group 120 includes a plurality of removal units that are rectangular spaces, and each removal unit is arranged in a checkered pattern.
  • the first coloring pattern 12 in which the removal portion group 120 is provided in the first coloring layer 11 has a plurality of square-shaped first coloring pixels in a checkered pattern. In the first coloring pattern 12, a plurality of first coloring pixels and a plurality of removal portions are formed in a checkered pattern.
  • the removal unit group 120 includes a first removal unit group 121 and a second removal unit group 122.
  • the first removal unit group 121 and the second removal unit group 122 are alternately arranged with respect to the removal unit group 120 formed in a checkered pattern.
  • the first colored pattern 12 includes the first colored pixels, the removed portions included in the first removed portion group 121, the first colored pixels, A pattern in which the removal portion and the first colored layer included in the removal portion group 122 are arranged in this order is repeated.
  • dry etching include JP-A-59-126506, JP-A-59-46628, JP-A-58-9108, JP-A-58-2809, JP-A-57-148706, JP-A-61-41102, and the like. And the contents thereof are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Dry etching is preferably performed in the following manner from the viewpoint of forming a pattern cross section closer to a rectangle and reducing damage to the support.
  • a mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas (O 2 ) the first stage etching is performed up to a region (depth) where the support is not exposed, and after this first stage etching, nitrogen gas ( N 2 ) and oxygen gas (O 2 ), and a second stage etching is preferably performed to the vicinity of the region (depth) where the support is exposed, and over-etching is performed after the support is exposed.
  • N 2 nitrogen gas
  • O 2 oxygen gas
  • a second stage etching is preferably performed to the vicinity of the region (depth) where the support is exposed, and over-etching is performed after the support is exposed.
  • the form containing these is preferable.
  • a specific method of dry etching and the first stage etching, second stage etching, and over-etching will be described.
  • Dry etching is performed by obtaining etching conditions in advance by the following method.
  • (1) The etching rate (nm / min) in the first stage etching and the etching rate (nm / min) in the second stage etching are calculated respectively.
  • (2) The time for etching the desired thickness in the first stage etching and the time for etching the desired thickness in the second stage etching are respectively calculated.
  • (3) The first stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above.
  • the second stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above. Alternatively, the etching time may be determined by endpoint detection, and the second stage etching may be performed according to the determined etching time.
  • Overetching time is calculated with respect to the total time of (3) and (4) above, and overetching is performed.
  • the mixed gas used in the first stage etching step preferably contains a fluorine-based gas and an oxygen gas (O 2 ) from the viewpoint of processing the organic material that is the film to be etched into a rectangular shape.
  • the first step etching process can avoid damage to the support by etching to a region where the support is not exposed.
  • the second-stage etching process and the over-etching process are performed in the first-stage etching process after etching to a region where the support is not exposed by the mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas, and from the viewpoint of avoiding damage to the support. Therefore, it is preferable to perform the etching process using a mixed gas of nitrogen gas and oxygen gas.
  • the ratio between the etching amount in the first stage etching process and the etching amount in the second stage etching process is preferably in the range of more than 0% and not more than 50%. 10 to 20% is more preferable.
  • the etching amount is an amount calculated from the difference between the remaining film thickness to be etched and the film thickness before etching.
  • the etching preferably includes an over-etching process.
  • the overetching process is preferably performed by setting an overetching ratio. Moreover, it is preferable to calculate the overetching ratio from the etching process time to be performed first.
  • the over-etching ratio can be arbitrarily set, but it is preferably 30% or less of the etching processing time in the etching process, and preferably 5 to 25% from the viewpoint of etching resistance of the photoresist and maintaining the rectangularity of the pattern to be etched. Is more preferable.
  • the resist pattern (etching mask) 52 remaining after the etching is removed.
  • the removal of the resist pattern 52 includes a step of applying a stripping solution or a solvent to the resist pattern 52 so that the resist pattern 52 can be removed, and a step of removing the resist pattern 52 using cleaning water.
  • a step of applying a stripping solution or a solvent on at least the resist pattern 52 and stagnating for a predetermined time to perform paddle development can be included.
  • the resist pattern 52 may be removed by spraying cleaning water onto the resist pattern 52 from a spray type or shower type spray nozzle.
  • cleaning water pure water can be preferably used.
  • the injection nozzle include an injection nozzle in which the entire support is included in the injection range, and an injection nozzle that is a movable injection nozzle and in which the movable range includes the entire support.
  • the first colored pixel is formed by photolithography, it is preferable to form the first colored layer using the first colored curable composition, and to expose and develop the first colored layer.
  • the method for forming the first colored layer is synonymous with the case where the first colored pixel is formed by dry etching, and the preferred range is also the same.
  • radiation (light) that can be used for exposure ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line are particularly preferable (particularly preferably i-line).
  • Irradiation dose (exposure dose) is more preferably 30 ⁇ 3000mJ / cm 2 is preferably 50 ⁇ 2500mJ / cm 2, particularly preferably 100 ⁇ 500mJ / cm 2.
  • the developer described in the step of forming the first colored pixels described above can be used.
  • a development method for example, a method in which a substrate is immersed in a tank filled with a developer for a certain period of time (dip method), a method in which the developer is raised on the surface of the substrate by surface tension and is left stationary for a certain time (paddle) Method), a method of spraying the developer on the substrate surface (spray method), a method of continuously discharging the developer while scanning the developer discharge nozzle on the substrate rotating at a constant speed (dynamic dispensing method) Etc.
  • the paddle method is particularly preferable.
  • the development time is not particularly limited as long as the colored layer in the unexposed area is sufficiently dissolved, and is usually 10 to 300 seconds. Preferably, it is 20 to 120 seconds.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably 0 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 35 ° C.
  • Step of Forming Second Colored Pixel the second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel is formed by photolithography using the second colored curable composition.
  • the number of steps can be reduced as compared with the case where all steps are performed by dry etching.
  • the second colored curable composition is used on the first colored pattern 12 by using the second colored curable composition. 21 layers are formed.
  • the second colored curable composition enters the removed portions of the first removed portion group 121 and the second removed portion group 122, and the second colored pattern 22 is formed in this portion.
  • the second colored curable composition is embedded in each of the removal portions in the first removal portion group 121 and the second removal portion group 122, and the first coloring pixel (that is, the first removal pixel group).
  • the second colored curable composition layer 21 is laminated with the second colored curable composition on the first colored pattern 12) in which the removed portion group 120 is formed on the colored layer 11 (step (C)). ).
  • the 2nd coloring pattern 22 which has a some 2nd coloring pixel in the removal part group 120 of the 1st coloring layer 11 is formed.
  • the second colored pixel is preferably a square pixel.
  • the second colored curable composition layer 21 can be formed in the same manner as the method for forming the first colored layer 11 described above.
  • the thickness of the second colored curable composition layer 21 after post-baking is preferably 0.1 to 1.5 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.1 to 1.0 ⁇ m.
  • step (D) by exposing and developing the position 21A corresponding to the first removal portion group 121 of the second colored curable composition layer 21, the second colored curable composition layer 21 and the second removal
  • the plurality of second colored pixels 22 ⁇ / b> R provided inside each removal part of the part group 122 are removed (step (D)) (see the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 9).
  • the 2nd coloring pixel adjacent to the 1st coloring pixel is formed.
  • the radiation (light) that can be used for the exposure is the same as the development method described in the method for forming the first colored pixels by photolithography described above, and the preferable range is also the same.
  • the developer the developer described in the step of forming the first colored pixels described above can be used.
  • the developing method is synonymous with the developing method described in the method of forming the first colored pixel by photolithography described above, and the preferable range is also the same.
  • the development time is not particularly limited as long as the colored layer in the unexposed area is sufficiently dissolved, and is usually 10 to 300 seconds. Preferably, it is 20 to 120 seconds.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably 0 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 35 ° C.
  • the manufacturing method of the color filter of this invention may further have the process of forming a 3rd colored pixel after the process of forming a 2nd colored pixel.
  • the third colored curable composition is used on the first colored pattern 12 and the second colored pattern 22 as shown in the schematic sectional view of FIG. 3 colored curable composition layer 31 is formed.
  • the third colored curable composition enters the removed portion of the second removed portion group 122, and the third colored pattern 32 is formed in this portion.
  • the third colored curable composition is embedded in each removal portion in the second removal portion group 122, and the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel (that is, the first removal portion).
  • the third colored curable composition layer 31 is formed from the third colored curable composition on the first colored pattern 12 in which the second colored pattern 22 is formed in the group 121 (Step ( E)). Thereby, the 3rd coloring pattern 32 which has a some 3rd coloring pixel in the 2nd removal part group 122 of the 1st coloring layer 11 is formed.
  • the third colored pixel is preferably a square pixel.
  • the formation of the third colored curable composition layer 31 can be performed in the same manner as the step of forming the second colored curable composition layer 21 described above.
  • the thickness of the third colored curable composition layer 31 after post-baking is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 1 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 0.2 to 0.8, and 0.3 to 0.6 ⁇ m. A range is more preferred.
  • the third colored curable composition layer 31 is removed by exposing and developing the position 31A of the third colored curable composition layer 31 corresponding to the second removal portion group 122.
  • the color filter 100 having the first colored pattern 12, the second colored pattern 22, and the third colored pattern 32 is manufactured (step (F) )).
  • the first colored curable composition or the second colored curable composition contains at least one of inorganic particles and a high refractive resin, and contains inorganic particles and a high refractive resin.
  • the first colored curable composition that does not contain and the second colored curable composition that does not contain the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin, the one having a smaller refractive index contains at least one of the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin.
  • the “first (or second) colored curable composition in a state not containing inorganic particles and a high refractive resin” is inorganic from the composition constituting the first (or second) colored composition.
  • the first (or second) coloring composition is composed of “inorganic particles, a colorant, a pigment dispersion, and a curable compound”
  • the “first (or second) containing no inorganic particles” is used.
  • Cold curable composition means a composition comprising “colorant, pigment dispersion and curable compound”. It is preferable that one having a small refractive index when the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are removed from the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition contains at least one of the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin. .
  • the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are included in the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition having a smaller refractive index in a state where the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are not included.
  • the first colored curable composition containing no inorganic particles and a high refractive resin has a smaller refractive index than the second colored curable composition containing no inorganic particles and a high refractive resin.
  • the colored curable composition preferably contains at least one of inorganic particles and a highly refractive resin.
  • at least one of the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition contains a phthalocyanine pigment.
  • the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition inorganic particles and the high refractive resin were removed from the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition.
  • the colored curable composition having a smaller refractive index preferably contains a phthalocyanine pigment in addition to at least one of the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin.
  • the difference in refractive index between the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition at a wavelength of 535 nm is preferably 0.10 or less, more preferably 0.06 or less, and It is more preferably 02 or less, and particularly preferably 0.
  • the first colored curable composition is a colored curable composition containing a colorant and at least one of inorganic particles and a highly refractive resin, and the refractive index of the colored curable composition is Further, the refractive index is 0.05 or more higher than the refractive index in the state not containing inorganic particles and high refractive resin.
  • the first colored curable composition can be used for pattern formation by dry etching or photolithography, and is preferably used for pattern formation by dry etching.
  • the first colored curable composition When the first colored curable composition is used for pattern formation by dry etching, the first colored curable composition comprises a colorant, at least one of inorganic particles and a high refractive resin, and polymerization as a curable compound. It is preferable to contain an ionic compound. Further, it may contain a solvent, a surfactant, a pigment dispersant and the like.
  • the first colored curable composition When the first colored curable composition is used for pattern formation by photolithography, the first colored curable composition includes a colorant, at least one of inorganic particles and a high refractive resin, an alkali-soluble resin, and a polymerization agent. It is preferable that an organic compound and a photoinitiator are included. Further, it may contain a solvent, a surfactant, a pigment dispersant and the like.
  • the first colored curable composition is preferably green. Hereinafter, each component of the first colored curable composition will be described in detail.
  • the inorganic particles used in the present invention preferably have a refractive index of 1.64 or more at a wavelength of 500 nm, more preferably 1.80 to 3.0, and 1.80 to 2.80. Is more preferable.
  • the weight average diameter of the primary particles of the inorganic particles is preferably 150 nm or less, more preferably 100 nm or less, and particularly preferably 80 nm or less. It is practical that the lower limit of the primary particles of the inorganic particles is 1 nm or more.
  • the weight average diameter of the inorganic particles in the colored pixel is preferably 200 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, still more preferably 100 nm or less, and particularly preferably 80 nm or less. Although there is no lower limit in particular, 1 nm or more is preferable, 5 nm or more is more preferable, and 10 nm or more is further more preferable.
  • the particle size range of the primary particles is defined as a range different from the particle size range in the colored pixel is that the primary particles are aggregated in the colored pixel.
  • the refractive index measuring method of the substance which comprises inorganic particles is based on Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS K 0062: 1992).
  • Examples of inorganic particles include at least one element selected from Ti, Zr, Sn, Sb, Cu, Fe, Mn, Pb, Cd, As, Cr, Hg, Zn, Al, Mg, Si, P, and S And particles containing a metal oxide having Specifically, particles of titanium dioxide (TiO 2 ), tin oxide, indium oxide, zinc oxide, or zirconium oxide (ZrO 2 ) can be given. Among these, particles of titanium dioxide, tin oxide, indium oxide, or zirconium oxide are particularly preferable, and particles of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide are more preferable.
  • the inorganic particles are mainly composed of oxides of these metals and can further contain other elements.
  • the main component means a component having the largest content (mass%) among the components constituting the particles.
  • examples of other elements include Ti, Zr, Sn, Sb, Cu, Fe, Mn, Pb, Cd, As, Cr, Hg, Zn, Al, Mg, Si, P, and S.
  • the crystal structure of the inorganic fine particles mainly composed of titanium dioxide is preferably a rutile, rutile / anatase mixed crystal, anatase or amorphous structure, and particularly preferably a rutile structure.
  • the inorganic particles are preferably surface-treated.
  • the surface treatment can be performed using an inorganic compound or an organic compound.
  • inorganic compounds used for the surface treatment include alumina, silica, zirconium oxide, and iron oxide. Of these, alumina and silica are preferable.
  • organic compound used for the surface treatment include polyols, alkanolamines, stearic acid, silane coupling agents, and titanate coupling agents.
  • an inorganic fine particle mainly composed of titanium dioxide contains at least one element selected from cobalt, aluminum, and zirconium.
  • the inorganic particles may be treated by combining two or more kinds of surface treatments.
  • the shape of the inorganic particles is preferably a rice grain shape, a spherical shape, a cubic shape, a spindle shape, or an indefinite shape.
  • the inorganic particles are preferably blended into the first colored curable composition and / or the second colored curable composition as a dispersion composition.
  • a dispersion composition for details, for example, the description in JP-A-2007-277514 can be referred to. It is particularly preferable to disperse using the dispersion resin described in Examples of JP-A-2007-277514.
  • the content of the inorganic particles in the first colored curable composition is 0.05 or more than the refractive index when the refractive index of the first colored curable composition does not include the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin. Higher amounts are preferred. Specifically, it is preferably 1.8 parts by mass or more and more preferably 2.0 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. Although it does not specifically limit as an upper limit, 30 mass parts or less are preferable with respect to a total of 100 mass parts of total solid content of 1st colored curable composition, and, as for an upper limit, 20 mass parts or less are more preferable. 10 parts by mass or less is more preferable. Only one type of inorganic particles may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that total amount satisfy
  • the high refractive resin means, for example, a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more at a wavelength of 500 nm, and the refractive index is preferably 1.60 to 2.00, more preferably 1.65 to 2.00. preferable.
  • the highly refractive resin preferably has a repeating unit having an aromatic ring group.
  • One type of repeating unit having an aromatic ring group may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • the repeating unit having an aromatic ring group may have an aromatic ring group in the main chain, or may have an aromatic ring group in the side chain.
  • the aromatic ring group may be either an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group, or may include both.
  • the aromatic ring group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, but is preferably polycyclic and more preferably a condensed aromatic ring group.
  • the condensed aromatic ring group is a group having two or more aromatic ring structures, and each ring has a structure sharing two or more atoms.
  • condensed aromatic hydrocarbon group for example, naphthyl group, acenaphthylenyl group, anthryl group, phenanthryl group, pyrenyl group, acephenanthrenyl group, aceanthrylenyl group, chrysenyl group, dibenzochrysenyl group, benzoanthryl group Group, dibenzoanthryl group, naphthacenyl group, picenyl group, pentacenyl group, fluorenyl group, 9,9-dihydroanthryl group, triphenylenyl group, perylenyl group, fluoranthenyl group, benzo [k] fluoranthenyl group, etc.
  • a naphthyl group is preferred.
  • the condensed aromatic heterocyclic group include indolyl group, quinolyl group, isoquinolyl group, phthalazinyl group, quinoxalinyl group, quinazolinyl group, carbazolyl group (including both 3-carbazolyl group and 9-carbazolyl group), acridinyl group, Examples include phenazinyl group, benzofuryl group, isothiazolyl group, isoxazolyl group, furazanyl group, phenoxazinyl group, benzothiazolyl group, benzoxazolyl group, benzimidazolyl group, benzotriazolyl group, pyranyl group, carbazolyl group, benzothiazolyl group, A benzoxazolyl group and a benzotriazolyl group are preferable, and a carbazolyl group is more preferable.
  • the repeating unit having a monocyclic aromatic ring group
  • the highly refractive resin preferably has a repeating unit represented by the formula (X).
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group is preferable.
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group (preferably having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group (preferably having 6 to 12 carbon atoms), —O—, —S.
  • A represents an aromatic ring group and has the same meaning as the aromatic ring group described above.
  • a in formula (X) may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthioxy group, and an aryl group.
  • acyloxy group alkylsulfanyl group, arylsulfanyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, acyloxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, amino group, phosphinoyl group, heterocyclic group Silyl ether group, thiol group, sulfonamide group, amide group, urea group, thiourea group, carboxyl group, urethane group, halogen atom, nitro group and the like.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by the formula (X) is preferably 40 to 95% by mass, and more preferably 60 to 90% by mass with respect to all the repeating units in the high refractive resin.
  • the highly refractive resin preferably further has a repeating unit having an acid group in addition to the repeating unit having an aromatic ring group.
  • a repeating unit having an acid group By having a repeating unit having an acid group, the photolithography performance can be further improved.
  • the acid group include a carboxyl group, an active methylene group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a carboxylic acid anhydride group, and the like, and a carboxyl group is preferable. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the high refractive resin preferably has a repeating unit represented by the formula (Y) as a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and specific examples include a methyl group.
  • L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 2 has the same meaning as the divalent linking group represented by L 1 in formula (X), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • B represents the acid group described above.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by the formula (Y) is preferably 5 to 60% by mass and more preferably 10 to 40% by mass with respect to all the repeating units in the high refractive resin.
  • the highly refractive resin preferably further has a repeating unit having a hydrophilic group in addition to the repeating unit having an aromatic ring group and the repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the hydrophilic group include a hydroxy group, an alkylene oxide group, a pyrrolidone group, a morpholine group, a 1,3-diketone group, an amino group, and an ammonium group, and a hydroxy group is preferable.
  • the alkylene oxide group a group represented by the following formula (W) is preferable. In the following formula (W), * represents a bonding position.
  • A represents an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms)
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms)
  • n represents an integer of 1 or more (preferably an integer of 1 to 25).
  • the pyrrolidone group, morpholine group and 1,3-diketone group each represent the following group. Note that * represents a bonding position.
  • the amino group is a concept including primary, secondary, and tertiary amino groups, and a group represented by the following formula (P) is preferable.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group each independently.
  • the highly refractive resin preferably has a repeating unit represented by the formula (Z) as a repeating unit having a hydrophilic group.
  • R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • An alkyl group is synonymous with the alkyl group represented by R ⁇ 1 > in Formula (X).
  • L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 3 has the same meaning as the divalent linking group represented by L 1 in formula (X).
  • C represents the hydrophilic group described above.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by the formula (Z) is preferably 5 to 80% by mass and more preferably 10 to 50% by mass with respect to all the repeating units in the high refractive resin.
  • the highly refractive resin can be produced, for example, by a known radical polymerization method.
  • Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent, etc. when producing a high refractive resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and experimental conditions are determined. It can also be done.
  • the following monomer hereinafter also referred to as monomer a
  • monomer a the following monomer (hereinafter also referred to as monomer a) can be used.
  • monomer b the following monomer (hereinafter also referred to as monomer b) can be used.
  • monomer c the following monomer (hereinafter also referred to as monomer c) can be used.
  • the high refractive resin include, but are not limited to, the exemplary resins described in Tables 1 and 2 below. Specifically, the exemplary resins 1 to 64 obtained by using the monomer a and the monomer b in the mass ratio described in Table 1 and the monomer a, the monomer b and the monomer c in the mass ratio described in Table 2 are used. Exemplified resins 65 to 118 obtained in this way are listed.
  • a compound having a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the following general formula (ED) and / or a compound represented by the following general formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimer”).
  • ether dimer a compound having a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the following general formula (ED) and / or a compound represented by the following general formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimer”).
  • ether dimer a compound having a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the following general formula (ED) and / or a compound represented by the following general formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimer”).
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 includes an alkyl group substituted with alkoxy, an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group such as benzyl, and the like.
  • primary or secondary carbon substituents that are difficult to be removed by acid or heat such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a benzyl group, are preferable.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the description in JP 2010-168539 A can be referred to.
  • Specific examples of the ether dimer include specific examples of the ether dimer described in paragraph 0565 of JP2012-208494A (paragraph 0694 of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/235099). Is incorporated herein.
  • dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dicyclohexyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis ( Methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dibenzyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate are preferred. Only one type of ether dimer may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • the acid value is not particularly limited, but is preferably 30 to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 50 to 150 mgKOH / g, and further preferably 100 to 150 mgKOH / g.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the high refractive resin is preferably 2000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more, and further preferably 7000 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 50000 or less, more preferably 30000 or less, and even more preferably 20000 or less.
  • the content of the high refractive resin in the first colored curable composition is 0.05 more than the refractive index in the state where the refractive index of the first colored curable composition does not include the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin. Higher amounts are preferred. Specifically, the content of the high refractive resin in the first colored curable composition is preferably 1% by mass or more and more preferably 2% by mass or more in the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. 3 mass% or more is more preferable. Only one type of high refractive resin may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that total amount satisfy
  • the mass ratio of the high refractive resin in the first colored curable composition to a resin other than the high refractive resin is preferably 50:50 to 100: 0.
  • the highly refractive resin can also be used as a pigment or inorganic particle dispersant contained in the first pixel.
  • the first colored curable composition usually contains a colorant.
  • a colorant a dye and / or a pigment can be used, and a pigment is preferably used. Only one colorant may be used, or two or more colorants may be used in combination.
  • the pigment used in the first colored curable composition include a pigment for making the first colored curable composition green, for example, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, or one or more selected from these green pigments, and C.I. I.
  • the pigment used in the first colored curable composition it is preferable to use a yellow pigment in combination with a green pigment.
  • the green pigment is C.I. which is a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment. I. One or more selected from Pigment Green 36 and 58 are preferred.
  • the yellow pigment is C.I. I. One or more selected from Pigment Yellow 139, 150, and 185 are preferred.
  • the pigment for making a 1st colored curable composition blue for example, C.I. I.
  • the blue pigment is phthalocyanine pigment C.I. I.
  • One or more selected from Pigment Blue 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 5, 15: 6, 16, 17: 1, 75, 79 are preferable.
  • the dye include, for example, JP-A No. 64-90403, JP-A No. 64-91102, JP-A No. 1-94301, JP-A No. 6-11614, No.
  • the first colored curable composition is made green or blue. It is preferable to use the dye.
  • the content of the colorant in the first colored curable composition is preferably 1 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. It is more preferable that it is 10 mass parts.
  • Pigment dispersion When a pigment is used for preparing the composition of the present invention, it is usually used as a pigment dispersion. From the viewpoint of improving the dispersibility of the pigment, it is preferable to further add a pigment dispersant.
  • a pigment dispersant may be used independently and may be used in combination of 2 or more type. Examples of the pigment dispersant include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight unsaturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic.
  • the polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer from the structure thereof.
  • the polymer dispersant acts to adsorb on the surface of the pigment and prevent reaggregation. Therefore, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer and a block polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface can be mentioned as preferred structures.
  • the pigment derivative has an effect of promoting the adsorption of the polymer dispersant by modifying the pigment surface.
  • the pigment dispersant that can be used in the present invention is also available as a commercial product. Specific examples of such a pigment dispersant include “Disperbyk-101 (polyamidoamine phosphate), 107 (carboxylic acid ester)”, 110 (manufactured by BYK Chemie).
  • Copolymer containing acid groups 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170 (polymer copolymer) "," BYK-P104, P105 (high molecular weight unsaturated polycarboxylic acid) ), EFKA 4047, 4050-4010-4165 (polyurethane type), EFKA 4330-4340 (block copolymer), 4400-4402 (modified polyacrylate), 5010 (polyesteramide), 5765 (high molecular weight polycarboxylic acid) Salt), 6220 (fatty acid polyester), 6745 Phthalocyanine derivatives), 6750 (azo pigment derivatives) ”,“ Ajisper PB821, PB822 ”manufactured by Ajinomoto Fan Techno,“ Floren TG-710 (urethane oligomer) ”manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co.,“ Polyflow No.
  • the pigment dispersant preferably contains a monomer derived from an acid group.
  • the pigment dispersant contains a monomer derived from an acid group, when a colored pixel is formed by photolithography, a residue generated on the base of the colored pixel can be further reduced.
  • the monomer derived from an acid group include a vinyl monomer having a carboxyl group and a vinyl monomer having a sulfonic acid group.
  • vinyl monomer having a carboxyl group examples include (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, cinnamic acid, and acrylic acid dimer.
  • an addition reaction product of a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate and a cyclic anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride, ⁇ - Carboxy-polycaprolactone mono (meth) acrylate and the like can also be used.
  • anhydride containing monomers such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride, as a precursor of a carboxyl group.
  • monomers having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate and maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride from the viewpoint of developing removability of unexposed areas.
  • An addition reaction product with a cyclic anhydride such as
  • Examples of the vinyl monomer having a sulfonic acid group include 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, and examples of the vinyl monomer having a phosphoric acid group include phosphoric acid mono (2-acryloyloxyethyl ester) and phosphoric acid mono (1-methyl-2-acryloyloxyethyl ester) and the like. Etc. are preferred.
  • the content of the pigment dispersant in the composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 80 parts by weight, more preferably 5 to 70 parts by weight, with respect to 100 parts by weight of the pigment as the colorant. More preferably, it is part by mass.
  • the first colored curable composition may further contain, for example, a solvent, a curable compound, a surfactant, a photopolymerization initiator, an alkali-soluble resin, and the like.
  • ⁇ solvent >>>> Only one type of solvent may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. Examples of solvents include esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, and lactic acid.
  • Ethyl, alkyl oxyacetate eg, methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate)
  • 3-oxypropionic acid Alkyl esters (eg, methyl 3-oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate, etc.
  • thermosetting compound for example, a compound having at least one group selected from an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group is preferable.
  • an epoxy compound is preferable, and a polyfunctional epoxy compound is more preferable.
  • a polymerizable compound is also preferable as the curable compound.
  • a polymerizable compound having at least one, preferably two or more terminal ethylenically unsaturated bonds is preferred.
  • dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (KAYARAD D-320 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Ethyleneoxy-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (commercially available is A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) and a structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are via ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues are preferred. Yes. These oligomer types can also be used.
  • KAYARAD DPCA series (DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, DPCA-120 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), etc. can be used.
  • descriptions in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-208494, paragraphs 0466 to 0495 (corresponding to [0571] to [0606] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099) can be referred to, and the contents thereof are described in the present specification. Embedded in the book. Only one type of curable compound may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination.
  • the content of the curable compound in the first colored curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass with respect to a total of 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. It is more preferably 1 to 15 parts by mass.
  • ⁇ Surfactant Only one surfactant may be used, or two or more surfactants may be used in combination.
  • various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • the composition of the present invention contains a fluorosurfactant, the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved. Sex can be improved more.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactant preferably has a fluorine content of 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and still more preferably 7 to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in the composition.
  • the fluorosurfactant include Megafac F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, and F-143.
  • nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerin ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1, Sol Perth 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Corporation), and the like.
  • cationic surfactant examples include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • anionic surfactant examples include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • silicone-based surfactants include Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torresilicone SH21PA, Torree Silicone SH28PA, Torree Silicone SH29PA, Torree Silicone SH30PA, Torree Silicone SH8400 (above, Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.) )), TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4442 (above, manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP341, KF6001, KF6002 (above, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) , BYK307, BYK323, BYK330 (above, manufactured by BYK Chemie) and the like.
  • the content of the surfactant in the first colored curable composition is preferably 0.001 to 2 parts by mass with respect to a total of 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. 0.005 to 1 part by mass is more preferable.
  • a photoinitiator is synonymous with the photoinitiator in the 2nd coloring curable composition mentioned later, and its preferable range is also the same. Only 1 type may be used for a photoinitiator and it may use 2 or more types together.
  • content of a photoinitiator is 0.01 with respect to a total of 100 mass parts of total solid of a 1st colored curable composition. It is preferably ⁇ 10 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 1 part by mass.
  • Alkali-soluble resin is synonymous with alkali-soluble resin in the 2nd coloring curable composition mentioned later, and its preferable range is also the same. Only 1 type may be used for alkali-soluble resin, and 2 or more types may be used together.
  • the content of the alkali-soluble resin is 0.1 to 20 with respect to a total of 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. The amount is preferably mass parts, more preferably 1 to 15 mass parts.
  • the first colored curable composition is prepared by mixing the above-described components.
  • the components constituting the first colored curable composition may be combined at once, or the components may be combined sequentially after dissolving and dispersing each component in a solvent. May be.
  • the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
  • the first colored curable composition is preferably filtered with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances and reducing defects. If it is conventionally used for the filtration use etc., it can use without being specifically limited.
  • fluorine resin such as PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), polyamide resin such as nylon-6 and nylon-6,6, polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (including high density and ultra high molecular weight), etc. Filter.
  • polypropylene including high density polypropylene
  • the pore size of the filter is preferably 0.01 ⁇ m or more, and more preferably 0.05 ⁇ m or more.
  • the pore size of the filter is preferably 7.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 3.0 ⁇ m or less, further preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or less.
  • different filters may be combined. At that time, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more. Moreover, you may combine the 1st filter of a different hole diameter within the range mentioned above.
  • the pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer.
  • a commercially available filter for example, it can be selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. .
  • the second filter a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
  • the filtering by the first filter may be performed only with the dispersion, and the second filtering may be performed after mixing other components.
  • the second colored curable composition preferably has a higher refractive index than the first colored curable composition containing no inorganic particles and a high refractive resin, and substantially contains the above-described inorganic particles and high refractive resin. It is preferable not to contain.
  • the second colored curable composition preferably contains at least a colorant and is red or green.
  • the second colored curable composition may further contain an alkali-soluble resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, a polymerization inhibitor, a surfactant, a solvent, an ultraviolet absorber, and the like. It is preferable to be used for pattern formation by.
  • each component of the second colored curable composition will be described in detail.
  • ⁇ Colorant a dye and / or a pigment can be used, and a pigment is preferably used. Only one colorant may be used, or two or more colorants may be used in combination.
  • the pigment used in the second colored curable composition include C.I. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, and , C.I. I.
  • the pigment for making the 2nd colored curable composition green for example, for making the 1st colored curable composition mentioned above green
  • these pigments can be used.
  • One or more selected from 80 can also be used.
  • the dye it is preferable to use a dye for making the second colored curable composition red or green among the dyes mentioned in the first colored curable composition.
  • the content of the colorant in the second colored curable composition is preferably 1 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. It is more preferable that it is 10 mass parts.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is, for example, a linear organic high molecular polymer having at least one alkali-soluble in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins having groups to promote. One kind of alkali-soluble resin may be used, or two or more kinds may be used in combination. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acryl / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable.
  • acrylic resins and acrylamide resins are preferable.
  • Resins and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
  • the group (acid group) that promotes alkali solubility include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group, but those that are soluble in an organic solvent and can be developed with a weak alkaline aqueous solution.
  • (meth) acrylic acid is mentioned as a particularly preferable thing.
  • These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the alkali-soluble resin may contain a structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer represented by the following formula (X).
  • formula (X) R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms
  • R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a benzene ring that may contain a benzene ring.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 15.
  • the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring.
  • Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
  • alkali-soluble resin examples include paragraphs 0558 to 0575 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding to [0685] to [0705] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099). Is incorporated herein.
  • the content of the alkali-soluble resin in the second colored curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass with respect to a total of 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. It is more preferably 1 to 15 parts by mass.
  • the polymerizable compound is synonymous with the polymerizable compound used in the first colored curable composition described above. Only one type of polymerizable compound may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the second colored curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 25 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. 1 to 20 parts by mass is more preferable.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of the above polymerization components, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. Only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. For example, those having photosensitivity to visible light from the ultraviolet region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some action with a photoexcited sensitizer and generates an active radical, or may be an initiator that initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of monomer.
  • the photopolymerization initiator examples include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime derivatives. Oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenones, and the like, with oxime compounds being particularly preferred.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.
  • acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime derivatives. Oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts
  • Examples of the oxime compound include those represented by the following formula (OX-1) or (OX-2) in paragraph 0513 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/235099, [0632]). Reference can be made to the description of the compounds represented, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Examples of oxime compounds include TRONLY TR-PBG-304, TRONLY TR-PBG-309, TRONLY TR-PBG-305 (manufactured by CHANGZHOU TRONLY NEW ELECTRONIC MATERIALS CO., LTD. Arc), Commercial products such as Ruze NCI-831 and Adeka Arcles NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA) can also be used.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the second colored curable composition is 0.01 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. The amount is preferably 0.1 to 1 part by mass.
  • polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol ), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine primary cerium salt, and the like.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the second colored curable composition is 0.0001 to 0.1 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. It is preferable.
  • ⁇ Surfactant and Solvent >>>
  • the surfactant and solvent used in the second colored curable composition are the same as the surfactant and solvent used in the first colored curable composition described above, and the preferred range is also the same.
  • UV absorber As the ultraviolet absorber, salicylate-based, benzophenone-based, benzotriazole-based, substituted acrylonitrile-based, triazine-based ultraviolet absorbers and the like can be used. As a commercial product, UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd.) can be used. Only one type of ultraviolet absorber may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber in the second colored curable composition is preferably 0.01 to 1 part by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. .
  • the present invention relates to a first colored curable composition and a second colored curable composition in which the difference in refractive index between the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0.10 or less.
  • the present invention also relates to a kit for producing a color filter comprising a sex composition. By using such a kit, generation
  • other colored curable compositions other than the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition described above may be used.
  • the 1st colored curable composition demonstrated green and the 2nd colored curable composition demonstrated red as a preferable form, it is not limited to this.
  • the refractive index of the first colored curable composition containing no inorganic particles and high refractive resin is smaller than that of the second colored curable composition containing no inorganic particles and high refractive resin, Color can be applied.
  • the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are described as examples as means for adjusting the refractive index difference between the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition. It is not limited to an example, You may use means other than an inorganic particle and highly refractive resin.
  • the solid-state imaging device includes a color filter obtained by the color filter manufacturing method according to the present invention.
  • the configuration of the solid-state imaging device in the present invention is a configuration provided with a color filter for a solid-state imaging device, and is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that functions as a solid-state imaging device.
  • As a solid-state image sensor the following structures are mentioned, for example.
  • a transfer electrode made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) is provided on a support, and the photodiode and the transfer electrode are provided on the support.
  • a light condensing means for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter
  • the solid-state imaging device 10 includes a light receiving element (photodiode) 42 provided on a silicon substrate, a color filter 13, a planarizing film 14, a microlens 15, and the like.
  • the planarizing film 14 is not necessarily provided.
  • FIG. 12 in order to clarify each part, the ratios of the thicknesses and widths are ignored, and some parts are exaggerated.
  • a P well 41 is provided on the silicon substrate, and a photodiode 42 is provided on a part of the surface of the P well.
  • An impurity diffusion layer 43 having an N-type impurity concentration higher than that of the photodiode 42 is provided on the surface of the P well 41 of the silicon substrate and in a region different from the above part.
  • An insulating film 47 such as SiO 2 or SiO 2 / SiN / SiO 2 is provided on the P well 41, the photodiode 42, and the impurity diffusion layer 43.
  • poly-Si, tungsten On the insulating film 47, poly-Si, tungsten, An electrode 44 made of tungsten silicide, Al, Cu or the like is provided.
  • a wiring layer 45 is formed above the electrode 44.
  • a BPSG film 46 and a P-SiN film 48 are provided above the wiring layer 45.
  • a planarizing film layer 49 is formed for the purpose of planarizing the surface of the P-SiN film 48 or uneven portions other than the pixel region.
  • the color filter 13 is formed on the planarizing film layer 49.
  • the color filter 13 includes a plurality of green pixels 20G, red pixels 20R, and blue pixels 20B that are two-dimensionally arranged. Each of the colored pixels 20R, 20G, and 20B is formed above the light receiving element 42.
  • the green pixels 20G are formed in a checkered pattern, and the blue pixels 20B and the red pixels 20R are formed between the green pixels 20G.
  • the colored pixels 20R, 20G, and 20B are displayed in a line in order to explain that the color filter 13 is composed of pixels of three colors.
  • the planarization film 14 is formed so as to cover the upper surface of the color filter 13 and planarizes the color filter surface.
  • the microlens 15 is a condensing lens arranged with the convex surface facing upward, and is provided above the planarizing film 14 (or a color filter when no planarizing film is provided) and above the light receiving element 42. Each microlens 15 efficiently guides light from the subject to each light receiving element 42.
  • the color filter of the present invention can also be preferably used for a micro O red type (micro OLED) display. This image display method is described, for example, on page 43 of "EL, PDP, LCD display -Technology and latest trends in the market- (issued by Toray Research Center Research Division 2001)".
  • PGMEA ether acetate
  • the prepared pigment dispersion was further subjected to a dispersion treatment at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a decompression mechanism. I did it.
  • This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Red pigment dispersion.
  • Green Pigment Dispersion Dispersion Containing Pigment Green (PG) 36 / Pigment Yellow (PY) 150 >> 7.80 parts of PG36, 6.38 parts of PY150, 4.49 parts of a pigment dispersant represented by the following formula (A), 1.50 parts of Resin Acryure-RD-F8 (Nippon Shokubai), and PGMEA The mixed liquid of 79.84 parts was mixed and dispersed for 3 hours by a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm diameter) to prepare a pigment dispersion.
  • the prepared pigment dispersion was further subjected to a dispersion treatment at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a decompression mechanism. I did it.
  • This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Green pigment dispersion.
  • k: l: m: n 25: 40: 5: 30 (polymerization molar ratio)
  • the weight average molecular weight is 10,000.
  • Green pigment dispersion B was obtained in the same manner as in the above Green pigment dispersion, except that the pigment dispersant represented by the formula (A) was changed to the following dispersant (B).
  • the numerical value written together with each structural unit represents the content (% by mass) of each structural unit.
  • the numerical value written together with the repeating part of the side chain indicates the number of repeating parts.
  • Blue pigment dispersion Dispersion containing Pigment Blue (PB) 15: 6 / Pigment Violet (PV) 23 >> 8.48 parts of PB15: 6, 3.81 parts of PV23, 2.65 parts of pigment dispersant BYK-161 (manufactured by BYK), 2.65 parts of Resin Acrycure-RD-F8 (Japan Catalyst), PGMEA was mixed and dispersed for 3 hours by a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm diameter) to prepare a pigment dispersion.
  • the prepared pigment dispersion was further subjected to a dispersion treatment at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a decompression mechanism. I did it.
  • This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Blue pigment dispersion.
  • Inorganic particle dispersion Dispersion containing TiO 2 ) TTO-51 (C) (Ishihara Sangyo) was mixed with 18.17 parts, the pigment dispersant represented by the above formula (A) was mixed with 4.91 parts, and PGMEA was mixed with 76.92 parts. 0.3 mm diameter) and mixed and dispersed for 3 hours. Thereafter, the mixture was further subjected to dispersion treatment at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) equipped with a decompression mechanism. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain an inorganic particle dispersion.
  • a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.
  • the weight average molecular weight is 12,000.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 4 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
  • Green pigment dispersion 2 (for dry etching) >> The compounds shown in Table 5 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 2.
  • the “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 5 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 6 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 7 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 8 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 10 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
  • Green pigment dispersion 8 (for photolithography) >> The compounds shown in Table 11 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 8.
  • the “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 11 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 12 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 13 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 14 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 15 below is the above-described Green pigment dispersion.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 16 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 17 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
  • Green pigment dispersion in Table 18 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
  • Green pigment dispersion B in the following Table 19 is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion B.
  • Initiator A was synthesized following the synthesis of Specific Compound 1 described in paragraphs 0162 to 0166 of JP2011-158655A. Initiator A
  • Green pigment dispersion B in Table 20 below is the Green pigment dispersion B described above.
  • Initiator A is initiator A described above.
  • Example 1 The above-mentioned Green composition 1 was applied onto a silicon wafer by spin coating so that the film thickness after film formation was 0.7 ⁇ m, and then heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes, and then 220 It heated at 5 degreeC for 5 minute (s), and obtained the 1st colored curable composition layer. Next, a first colored pixel of 1.0 ⁇ m was obtained by using a dry etching method for the first colored curable composition layer. Next, the above-described Red composition 1 is applied on the silicon wafer on which the first colored pixels are formed by spin coating so that the film thickness after film formation becomes 0.7 ⁇ m, and then on the hot plate.
  • a second colored curable composition layer was obtained by heating at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes.
  • the obtained second colored curable composition layer was exposed to a 1.0 ⁇ m dot pattern through a mask using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.).
  • paddle development was performed for 60 seconds at 23 ° C. using a 0.3% aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) for the second colored curable composition layer after exposure.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • the residue of the 2nd coloring curable composition layer remaining on the 1st coloring pixel at this time was observed with SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope). Judgment criteria are as follows. The results are shown in Table 24 below. A: No residue is observed B: Partial residue is observed on the first colored pixel C: Residue is observed on the entire first colored pixel ⁇ Example 2 >> The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed by SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 2 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
  • Example 3 The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed by SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 3 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
  • ⁇ Example 4 The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 4 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
  • ⁇ Example 5 The second composition remaining on the first colored pixel is the same as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 is changed to the above-described Blue composition 1 and the Red composition 1 is changed to the above-described Green composition 13.
  • Example 6 The second composition remaining on the first colored pixel is the same as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 is changed to the above-described Blue composition 2 and the Red composition 1 is changed to the above-described Green composition 13. The residue of the colored curable composition layer was observed with an SEM. The results are shown in Table 25 below.
  • Comparative Example 1 The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 5 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
  • ⁇ Comparative Example 2 >> The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed by SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 6 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
  • ⁇ Comparative Example 3 >> The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixel was observed by SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 7 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
  • ⁇ Comparative Example 4 >> The second composition remaining on the first colored pixel is the same as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 is changed to the above-described Blue composition 3 and the Red composition 1 is changed to the above-described Green composition 13. The residue of the colored curable composition layer was observed with an SEM. The results are shown in Table 25 below.
  • Example 7 The green composition 8 is applied on a silicon wafer by a spin coat method so that the film thickness after film formation becomes 0.7 ⁇ m, and then heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes on a hot plate for the first coloring. A curable composition layer was obtained. Next, the obtained first colored curable composition layer was exposed to a 1.0 ⁇ m dot pattern through a mask using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.). Next, paddle development was performed for 60 seconds at 23 ° C. using a 0.3% aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) for the first colored curable composition layer after exposure.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • Example 9 The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Green composition 8 was changed to the Green composition 10. The results are shown in Table 26 below.
  • ⁇ Comparative Example 5 The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Green composition 8 was changed to the Green composition 11. The results are shown in Table 26 below.
  • ⁇ Comparative Example 6 The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Green composition 8 was changed to the Green composition 12. The results are shown in Table 26 below.
  • ⁇ Comparative Example 7 A residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Green composition 8 was changed to the Green composition 13. The results are shown in Table 26 below.
  • Examples 10 to 14 Except for changing PG36 and PY150 in the Green pigment dispersion used in Green Composition 1 to the Green pigment type and Yellow pigment type shown in Table 27 below, it remains on the first colored pixel as in Example 1. The residue of the 2nd coloring curable composition layer was observed in SEM. The results are shown in Table 27 below.
  • Examples 15 to 19 The second colored curable composition remaining on the first colored pixel as in Example 7 except that PG36 and PY150 in the Green pigment dispersion were changed to the Green pigment type and Yellow pigment type shown in Table 27 below. The residue of the physical layer was observed with SEM. The results are shown in Table 27 below.
  • Comparative Examples 8 to 12 The second colored curable composition remaining on the first colored pixel as in Comparative Example 3, except that PG36 and PY150 in the Green pigment dispersion were changed to the Green pigment type and Yellow pigment type shown in Table 27 below. The residue of the physical layer was observed with SEM. The results are shown in Table 27 below.
  • Comparative Examples 13 to 17 The second colored curable composition remaining on the first colored pixel as in Comparative Example 7, except that PG36 and PY150 in the Green pigment dispersion were changed to the Green pigment type and Yellow pigment type shown in Table 27 below. The residue of the physical layer was observed with SEM. The results are shown in Table 27 below.
  • Examples 20 to 23 The second colored curing that remains on the first colored pixels is the same as in Example 1 except that the green composition 1 is changed to the green composition 14 and the exemplary resin shown in Table 28 below is used as the high refractive resin. The residue of the composition layer was observed with SEM. The results are shown in Table 28 below.
  • the exemplary resin 18, the exemplary resin 23, the exemplary resin 69, and the exemplary resin 96 correspond to the exemplary resin described above.
  • Examples 23 to 27 The second colored curing that remains on the first colored pixel is the same as in Example 7 except that the green composition 8 is changed to the green composition 15 and the exemplified resin shown in Table 28 below is used as the high refractive resin. The residue of the composition layer was observed with SEM.
  • the refractive indexes of the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel are the refractive indexes at the wavelength of 535 nm of the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel, and the ellipsometer UVISEL / 460-FUV. -Results of measurement using AGAS (Horiba Seisakusho).

Abstract

Provided are: a color filter production method capable of suppressing the occurrence of residue when forming a color filter; a color filter; a colored curable composition; a solid state imaging element; and a colored curable composition and kit. The color filter production method has: a step in which a first colored curable composition is used and first colored pixels are formed upon a supporting body; and a step in which a second colored curable composition is used and second colored pixels adjacent to the first colored pixels are formed using photolithography. The difference between the refractive index of the first colored curable composition and that of the second colored curable composition in the 535 nm wavelength range is no more than 0.10.

Description

カラーフィルタ、その製造方法、着色硬化性組成物、固体撮像素子、着色硬化性組成物およびキットColor filter, manufacturing method thereof, colored curable composition, solid-state imaging device, colored curable composition, and kit
 本発明は、カラーフィルタ、その製造方法、着色硬化性組成物、固体撮像素子、着色硬化性組成物およびキットに関する。 The present invention relates to a color filter, a production method thereof, a colored curable composition, a solid-state imaging device, a colored curable composition, and a kit.
 カラーフィルタは、固体撮像素子や液晶表示装置のディスプレイに不可欠な構成部品である。このようなカラーフィルタを形成するために、着色組成物が採用されている(例えば特許文献1、2)。 The color filter is an indispensable component for the display of a solid-state image sensor or liquid crystal display device. In order to form such a color filter, a colored composition is employed (for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).
特開2011-32366号公報JP 2011-32366 A 米国特許第8361680号明細書U.S. Pat. No. 8,361,680
 図13は、従来のカラーフィルタの製造方法の一例を示す概念図であって、200はカラーフィルタを、201は第1の着色画素を、202は第2の着色画素を、203はマスクを、204は第2の着色画素を形成するための着色硬化性組成物を、205は第2の着色画素の残渣をそれぞれ示している。
 図13に示すように、着色硬化性組成物204を用いて、カラーフィルタ200における第1の着色画素201に隣接する第2の着色画素202を形成する際に、所定のパターンを有するマスク203を介して照射された光が、第1の着色画素201を透過せずに第1の着色画素201の表面で反射し、着色硬化性組成物204において光照射がされる予定の部分以外に反射光が照射されてしまう場合がある。その結果、着色硬化性組成物204の不要な硬化反応が起こる。結果として、着色硬化性組成物204を現像した後の第1の着色画素201および/または第2の着色画素202上には、着色硬化性組成物204の残渣205が発生する場合があることがわかった。
 本願発明は、かかる問題点を解決するものであって、カラーフィルタを形成する際の残渣の発生を抑制できるカラーフィルタの製造方法を提供することを目的とする。また、カラーフィルタ、着色硬化性組成物、固体撮像素子、着色硬化性組成物およびキットを提供することを目的とする。
FIG. 13 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a conventional color filter manufacturing method, in which 200 is a color filter, 201 is a first colored pixel, 202 is a second colored pixel, 203 is a mask, Reference numeral 204 denotes a colored curable composition for forming a second colored pixel, and 205 denotes a residue of the second colored pixel.
As shown in FIG. 13, when forming the second colored pixel 202 adjacent to the first colored pixel 201 in the color filter 200 using the colored curable composition 204, a mask 203 having a predetermined pattern is formed. The light irradiated through the first colored pixel 201 is reflected by the surface of the first colored pixel 201 without passing through the first colored pixel 201, and is reflected in a portion other than the portion that is to be irradiated with light in the colored curable composition 204. May be irradiated. As a result, an unnecessary curing reaction of the colored curable composition 204 occurs. As a result, a residue 205 of the colored curable composition 204 may be generated on the first colored pixel 201 and / or the second colored pixel 202 after the colored curable composition 204 is developed. all right.
This invention solves this problem, and it aims at providing the manufacturing method of the color filter which can suppress generation | occurrence | production of the residue at the time of forming a color filter. Moreover, it aims at providing a color filter, a colored curable composition, a solid-state image sensor, a colored curable composition, and a kit.
 かかる状況のもと本願発明者が検討を行った結果、第1の着色画素および第2の着色画素に用いられる着色硬化性組成物間の屈折率差を小さくすることで、上記課題を解決できることを見出した。
 具体的には、以下の解決手段<1>により、好ましくは、<2>~<18>により、上記課題は解決された。
<1>支持体と、支持体上に形成された第1の着色画素と、第1の着色画素に隣接する第2の着色画素と、を有し、
 第1の着色画素と第2の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下である、カラーフィルタ。
<2>第1の着色画素および第2の着色画素のうち少なくとも一方がフタロシアニン顔料を含む、<1>に記載のカラーフィルタ。
<3>第1の着色画素または第2の着色画素が無機粒子および屈折率が1.60以上の樹脂の少なくとも一方を含み、
 無機粒子および上記樹脂は、第1の着色画素および第2の着色画素のうち、無機粒子および上記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方に含まれる、<1>または<2>に記載のカラーフィルタ。
<4>第1の着色画素または第2の着色画素が無機粒子を含み、
 無機粒子は、第1の着色画素および第2の着色画素のうち、無機粒子および上記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方に含まれる、<1>または<2>に記載のカラーフィルタ。
<5>第1の着色画素および第2の着色画素のうち、無機粒子および上記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方にフタロシアニン顔料が含まれる、<3>に記載のカラーフィルタ。
<6>無機粒子として、二酸化チタンおよび酸化ジルコニウムのうち少なくともいずれか一方を含む、<3>~<5>のいずれかに記載のカラーフィルタ。
<7>支持体上に、第1の着色硬化性組成物を用いて第1の着色画素を形成する工程と、
 第2の着色硬化性組成物を用いて、第1の着色画素に隣接する第2の着色画素をフォトリソグラフィーにより形成する工程と、
 を有し、
 第1の着色硬化性組成物と第2の着色硬化性組成物との波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下である、カラーフィルタの製造方法。
<8>第1の着色硬化性組成物および第2の着色硬化性組成物のうち少なくとも一方がフタロシアニン顔料を含む、<7>に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
<9>第1の着色硬化性組成物または第2の着色硬化性組成物が無機粒子および屈折率が1.60以上の樹脂の少なくとも一方を含み、
 無機粒子および上記樹脂は、第1の着色硬化性組成物および第2の着色硬化性組成物のうち、無機粒子および上記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方に含まれる、<7>または<8>に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
<10>第1の着色硬化性組成物および第2の着色硬化性組成物のうち、無機粒子および上記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方にフタロシアニン顔料が含まれる、<9>に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
<11>無機粒子が、二酸化チタンおよび酸化ジルコニウムのうち少なくともいずれか一方である、<9>または<10>に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
<12>第1の着色硬化性組成物が無機粒子および屈折率が1.60以上の樹脂の少なくとも一方を含み、かつ、
 無機粒子上記樹脂を含む状態の第1の着色硬化性組成物の屈折率が、無機粒子および上記樹脂を含まない状態の第1の着色硬化性組成物の屈折率よりも0.05以上高い、<7>~<11>のいずれかに記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
<13><7>~<12>のいずれかに記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により得られたカラーフィルタ。
<14><1>~<6>、<13>のいずれかに記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。
<15><7>~<12>のいずれかに記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により得られたカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。
<16>着色剤と、無機粒子および屈折率が1.60以上の樹脂の少なくとも一方とを含む着色硬化性組成物であって、
 着色硬化性組成物の屈折率が、無機粒子および上記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率よりも0.05以上高い、着色硬化性組成物。
<17>無機粒子として、二酸化チタンおよび酸化ジルコニウムのうち少なくともいずれか一方を含む、<16>に記載の着色硬化性組成物。
<18>第1の着色硬化性組成物と第2の着色硬化性組成物とを備え、
 第1の着色硬化性組成物と第2の着色硬化性組成物の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下である、カラーフィルタを製造するためのキット。
As a result of the study by the present inventors under such circumstances, the above problem can be solved by reducing the difference in refractive index between the colored curable compositions used in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel. I found.
Specifically, the above-mentioned problem has been solved by the following means <1>, preferably <2> to <18>.
<1> a support, a first colored pixel formed on the support, and a second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel,
A color filter in which a difference in refractive index between a first colored pixel and a second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0.10 or less.
<2> The color filter according to <1>, wherein at least one of the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel contains a phthalocyanine pigment.
<3> The first colored pixel or the second colored pixel includes at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more,
<1> or <2>, wherein the inorganic particles and the resin are included in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel that have a smaller refractive index when the inorganic particles and the resin are not included. Color filter.
<4> The first colored pixel or the second colored pixel contains inorganic particles,
The color filter according to <1> or <2>, wherein the inorganic particles are included in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel that have a smaller refractive index when the inorganic particles and the resin are not included. .
<5> The color filter according to <3>, wherein the phthalocyanine pigment is contained in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel having a smaller refractive index in a state where the inorganic particles and the resin are not included.
<6> The color filter according to any one of <3> to <5>, which contains at least one of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide as inorganic particles.
<7> forming a first colored pixel on the support using the first colored curable composition;
Forming a second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel by photolithography using the second colored curable composition;
Have
The manufacturing method of a color filter whose difference in refractive index in wavelength 535nm of the 1st colored curable composition and the 2nd colored curable composition is 0.10 or less.
<8> The method for producing a color filter according to <7>, wherein at least one of the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition contains a phthalocyanine pigment.
<9> The first colored curable composition or the second colored curable composition contains at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more,
<7> The inorganic particles and the resin are included in the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition having a smaller refractive index in a state in which the inorganic particles and the resin are not included. Or the manufacturing method of the color filter as described in <8>.
<10> Among the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition, the phthalocyanine pigment is contained in the one having a smaller refractive index in the state containing no inorganic particles and the resin, <9> The manufacturing method of the color filter of description.
<11> The method for producing a color filter according to <9> or <10>, wherein the inorganic particles are at least one of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide.
<12> The first colored curable composition contains at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more, and
The refractive index of the first colored curable composition in a state containing inorganic particles and the resin is higher than the refractive index of the first colored curable composition in a state not containing inorganic particles and the resin by 0.05 or more, <7> The method for producing a color filter according to any one of <11>.
<13> A color filter obtained by the method for producing a color filter according to any one of <7> to <12>.
<14> A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to any one of <1> to <6> and <13>.
<15> A solid-state imaging device having a color filter obtained by the method for producing a color filter according to any one of <7> to <12>.
<16> a colored curable composition comprising a colorant and at least one of a resin having an inorganic particle and a refractive index of 1.60 or more,
A colored curable composition, wherein the refractive index of the colored curable composition is 0.05 or more higher than the refractive index in a state in which the inorganic particles and the resin are not included.
<17> The colored curable composition according to <16>, which contains at least one of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide as inorganic particles.
<18> A first colored curable composition and a second colored curable composition,
A kit for producing a color filter, wherein a difference in refractive index between a first colored curable composition and a second colored curable composition at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0.10 or less.
 本発明によれば、カラーフィルタを形成する際の残渣の発生を抑制することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress the generation of residues when forming a color filter.
図1は、本発明のカラーフィルタの一例を模式的に示す平面図である。FIG. 1 is a plan view schematically showing an example of the color filter of the present invention. 図2は、本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法の一例を示す概念図である。FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a method for producing a color filter of the present invention. 図3は、第1の着色層の概略断面図である。FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first colored layer. 図4は、第1の着色層の上にフォトレジスト層が形成された状態を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which a photoresist layer is formed on the first colored layer. 図5は、第1の着色層の上にレジストパターンが形成された状態を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which a resist pattern is formed on the first colored layer. 図6は、エッチングによって第1の着色層に除去部群が設けられることにより、第1の着色パターンが形成された状態を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which a first colored pattern is formed by providing a removal portion group in the first colored layer by etching. 図7は、図6におけるレジストパターンが除去された状態を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 7 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state where the resist pattern in FIG. 6 is removed. 図8は、第2の着色パターンおよび第2の着色硬化性組成物層が形成された状態を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 8 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which the second colored pattern and the second colored curable composition layer are formed. 図9は、図8における第2の着色硬化性組成物層と、第2の着色パターンを構成する第2の着色画素の一部とが、除去された状態を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 9 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which the second colored curable composition layer in FIG. 8 and a part of the second colored pixels constituting the second colored pattern have been removed. 図10は、第3の着色パターンおよび第3の着色硬化性組成物層が形成された状態を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 10 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which the third colored pattern and the third colored curable composition layer are formed. 図11は、図10における第3の着色硬化性組成物層が除去された状態を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 11 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which the third colored curable composition layer in FIG. 10 has been removed. 図12は、カラーフィルタおよび固体撮像素子の構成例を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 12 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a configuration example of a color filter and a solid-state imaging device. 図13は、従来のカラーフィルタの製造方法の一例を模式的に示す平面図である。FIG. 13 is a plan view schematically showing an example of a conventional color filter manufacturing method.
 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされることがあるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に限定されるものではない。
 本明細書において「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものも包含する。例えば「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)も包含する。
 本明細書において、“(メタ)アクリレート”はアクリレートおよびメタクリレートを表し、“(メタ)アクリル”はアクリルおよびメタクリルを表し、“(メタ)アクリロイル”はアクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルを表す。
 本明細書において、「着色層」は、カラーフィルタに用いられる画素を意味する。
 本明細書における顔料とは、例えば、溶剤に溶解しない不溶性の色素化合物を意味する。ここで、溶剤とは、後述する溶剤の欄で例示する溶剤が挙げられる。したがって、これらの溶剤に溶解しない色素化合物が本発明における顔料に該当する。
 本明細書において、領域を区切らずに基板(例えばシリコン基板)上に形成されている着色膜を「着色(着色感放射線性)層」といい、パターン状に領域を区切って形成されている着色膜(例えば、ストライプ状にパターニングされている膜等)を「着色パターン」という。着色画素とは、着色パターン中に複数存在する、カラーフィルタの構成要素である。
 本発明で用いられる化合物の重量平均分子量は、GPC測定によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。重量平均分子量は、例えば、HLC-8220(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとしてTSKgel Super AWM―H(東ソー(株)製、6.0mmID×15.0cm)を、溶離液として10mmol/L リチウムブロミドNMP(N-メチルピロリジノン)溶液を用いることによって求めることができる。
Hereinafter, the contents of the present invention will be described in detail. The description of the constituent elements described below may be made based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
In the present specification, “to” is used in the sense of including the numerical values described before and after it as lower and upper limits.
In the notation of a group (atomic group) in this specification, the notation which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes what has a substituent with what does not have a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In the present specification, “(meth) acrylate” represents acrylate and methacrylate, “(meth) acryl” represents acryl and methacryl, and “(meth) acryloyl” represents acryloyl and methacryloyl.
In the present specification, the “colored layer” means a pixel used for a color filter.
The pigment in this specification means, for example, an insoluble coloring compound that does not dissolve in a solvent. Here, the solvent includes the solvent exemplified in the solvent column described later. Therefore, the coloring compound which does not melt | dissolve in these solvents corresponds to the pigment in this invention.
In this specification, a colored film formed on a substrate (for example, a silicon substrate) without dividing the region is referred to as a “colored (colored radiation sensitive) layer”, and the coloring formed by dividing the region into a pattern. A film (for example, a film patterned in a stripe shape) is referred to as a “colored pattern”. A colored pixel is a component of a color filter that exists in a plurality of colored patterns.
The weight average molecular weight of the compound used in the present invention is defined as a polystyrene converted value by GPC measurement. The weight average molecular weight is, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), TSKgel Super AWM-H (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 6.0 mm ID × 15.0 cm) as a column, and 10 mmol / L as an eluent. It can be determined by using a lithium bromide NMP (N-methylpyrrolidinone) solution.
 以下、本発明のカラーフィルタおよびその製造方法、固体撮像素子について詳述する。以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされることがあるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, the color filter of the present invention, the manufacturing method thereof, and the solid-state imaging device will be described in detail. The description of the constituent elements described below may be made based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
<カラーフィルタ>
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、基板と、この基板上に形成された第1の着色画素と、この第1の着色画素に隣接する第2の着色画素を有し、第1の着色画素と第2の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下である。このように、カラーフィルタにおける第1の着色画素と第2の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下であることにより、カラーフィルタを形成する際の残渣の発生を抑制することができる。第1の着色画素と第2の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下であることが好ましく、0.06以下であることがより好ましく、0.02以下であることがさらに好ましく、0であることが特に好ましい。
 第1の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率は、1.58~1.85であることが好ましく、1.58~1.83であることがより好ましい。また、第2の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率は、第1の着色画素と第2の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下であれば、特に限定されるものではない。
 第1の着色画素と第2の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率は、例えば、エリプソメータUVISEL/460-FUV-AGAS(堀場製作所製)を用いて測定することができる。
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、例えば、2次元配列された複数の第1の着色画素およびこの第1の着色画素に隣接する複数の第2の着色画素を少なくとも有することが好ましく、第1の着色画素に隣接する複数の第3の着色画素をさらに有することがより好ましい。
<Color filter>
The color filter of the present invention includes a substrate, a first colored pixel formed on the substrate, and a second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel, and the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel. The difference in refractive index of the colored pixel at 535 nm is 0.10 or less. As described above, the difference in refractive index at the wavelength 535 nm between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel in the color filter is 0.10 or less, thereby suppressing the generation of residue when forming the color filter. Can do. The difference in refractive index between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is preferably 0.10 or less, more preferably 0.06 or less, and further preferably 0.02 or less. 0 is particularly preferable.
The refractive index of the first colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is preferably 1.58 to 1.85, and more preferably 1.58 to 1.83. The refractive index of the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is not particularly limited as long as the difference in refractive index between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0.10 or less. .
The refractive index of the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm can be measured using, for example, an ellipsometer UVISEL / 460-FUV-AGAS (manufactured by Horiba, Ltd.).
The color filter of the present invention preferably includes, for example, at least a plurality of first colored pixels arranged two-dimensionally and a plurality of second colored pixels adjacent to the first colored pixels. It is more preferable to further have a plurality of third colored pixels adjacent to.
 図1は、本発明のカラーフィルタの一例を模式的に示す平面図である。カラーフィルタ1は第1の着色画素2と、第2の着色画素3と、第3の着色画素6とを含む。カラーフィルタ1は、図1に示すように、第1の着色画素2が市松模様に形成されるとともに、第2の着色画素3および第3の着色画素6が各第1の着色画素2の間に形成されていることが好ましい。また、第1の着色画素2が、第2の着色画素3および第3の着色画素6よりも多く形成されていることが好ましい。
 第1の着色画素2および第2の着色画素3の少なくとも一方がフタロシアニン顔料を含むことが好ましい。
 第1の着色画素2または第2の着色画素3が無機粒子および屈折率が1.60以上の樹脂(以下、「高屈折樹脂」ともいう。)の少なくとも一方を含み、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂は、第1の着色画素および第2の着色画素のうち、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方に含まれることが好ましい。特に、第1の着色画素および第2の着色画素のうち、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方に、フタロシアニン顔料がさらに含まれることが好ましい。
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、第1の着色画素が緑色画素であり、第2の着色画素が赤色画素であり、第1の画素が無機粒子および高屈折樹脂の少なくとも一方を含み、第2の着色画素が無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を実質的に含まず、第1の着色画素と第2の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下であることが好ましい。また、第1の着色画素が青色画素であり、第2の着色画素が緑色画素であり、第1の画素が無機粒子および高屈折樹脂の少なくとも一方を含み、第2の着色画素が無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を実質的に含まず、第1の着色画素と第2の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下であることが好ましい。
 無機粒子および高屈折樹脂については後に詳述する。ここで、第2の着色画素が無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を実質的に含まないとは、第2の着色画素中における無機粒子および高屈折樹脂の含有量の合計量が、1質量%以下であることをいい、0質量%であることが好ましい。
FIG. 1 is a plan view schematically showing an example of the color filter of the present invention. The color filter 1 includes a first colored pixel 2, a second colored pixel 3, and a third colored pixel 6. As shown in FIG. 1, the color filter 1 includes a first colored pixel 2 formed in a checkered pattern, and a second colored pixel 3 and a third colored pixel 6 between the first colored pixels 2. It is preferable to be formed. Moreover, it is preferable that the 1st coloring pixel 2 is formed more than the 2nd coloring pixel 3 and the 3rd coloring pixel 6. FIG.
It is preferable that at least one of the first colored pixel 2 and the second colored pixel 3 contains a phthalocyanine pigment.
The first colored pixel 2 or the second colored pixel 3 contains at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more (hereinafter also referred to as “high refractive resin”), and includes inorganic particles and high refractive resin. Is preferably included in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel that have a smaller refractive index in a state where the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are not included. In particular, it is preferable that a phthalocyanine pigment is further included in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel that have a smaller refractive index in a state in which the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are not included.
In the color filter of the present invention, the first coloring pixel is a green pixel, the second coloring pixel is a red pixel, the first pixel includes at least one of inorganic particles and a high refractive resin, and the second coloring It is preferable that the pixel does not substantially contain inorganic particles and high refractive resin, and the difference in refractive index between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0.10 or less. The first colored pixel is a blue pixel, the second colored pixel is a green pixel, the first pixel includes at least one of inorganic particles and a high refractive resin, and the second colored pixel is inorganic particles and It is preferable that the refractive index difference between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel at a wavelength of 535 nm is substantially 0.10 or less without substantially containing a high refractive resin.
The inorganic particles and the high refractive resin will be described in detail later. Here, the second colored pixel substantially does not contain inorganic particles and a high refractive resin. The total amount of the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin in the second colored pixel is 1% by mass or less. That is, it is preferably 0% by mass.
 カラーフィルタ1は、厚みが1.0μm以下であることが好ましく、0.8μm以下であることが好ましい。
 カラーフィルタ1において、第1の着色画素2および第2の着色画素3の厚さは、1.0μm以下であることが好ましく、0.8μm以下であることが好ましい。
 カラーフィルタ1において、第1の着色画素2および第2の着色画素3における一辺の長さ(画素が長方形である場合は短辺の長さであり、画素が正方形である場合は一辺の長さを指す)は、画像解像度の観点から、1.0~0.4μmが好ましく、0.8~0.4μmがより好ましい。
The color filter 1 preferably has a thickness of 1.0 μm or less, and preferably 0.8 μm or less.
In the color filter 1, the thickness of the first colored pixel 2 and the second colored pixel 3 is preferably 1.0 μm or less, and preferably 0.8 μm or less.
In the color filter 1, the length of one side of the first colored pixel 2 and the second colored pixel 3 (the length of one side when the pixel is a rectangle, the length of one side when the pixel is a square) Is preferably from 1.0 to 0.4 μm, more preferably from 0.8 to 0.4 μm from the viewpoint of image resolution.
<カラーフィルタの製造方法>
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法は、支持体上に、第1の着色硬化性組成物を用いて第1の着色画素を形成する工程、第2の着色硬化性組成物を用いて、第1の着色画素に隣接する第2の着色画素をフォトリソグラフィーにより形成する工程を有し、第1の着色硬化性組成物と第2の着色硬化性組成物の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下である。
 なお、第1の着色画素と第2の着色硬化性組成物との屈折率の差は、第1の着色画素と第2の着色画素との屈折率の差、及び、第1の着色硬化性組成物と第2の着色硬化性組成物との屈折率の差と、実質的に同様である。
 図2は、本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法の一例を示す概念図である。カラーフィルタ1は、第1の着色画素2と、この第1の着色画素2に隣接する第2の着色画素3とを含む。第2の着色画素3を形成するための着色硬化性組成物5に、所定のパターンを有するマスク4を介して光照射することで、所定のパターンを有する第2の着色画素が形成される。
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法によれば、カラーフィルタ1を形成する際の第2の着色硬化性組成物の残渣の発生を抑制することができる。「第2の着色硬化性組成物の残渣」とは、所望する部分以外に、第2の着色硬化性組成物が形成されることをいう。第2の着色硬化性組成物の残渣の発生が抑制される理由は、以下のように推定される。第1の着色画素2を形成するための第1の着色硬化性組成物と、第2の着色画素を形成するための第2の着色硬化性組成物との屈折率差を小さくすることにより、第2の着色画素3を形成する際に、マスク4を介して照射された光が、第1の着色画素2に透過せずにこの第1の着色画素2の表面で反射することが低減される。このため、この第1の着色画素2の表面での反射光が低減されることにより、光照射がされる予定の部分以外の着色硬化性組成物5に光が照射されてしまうことを抑制することができる。そして、この反射光によって、着色硬化性組成物5に不要な硬化反応が起こることを抑制することができる。その結果、着色硬化性組成物5を現像した後の第1の着色画素2および/または第2の着色画素3上には、着色硬化性組成物5の残渣が発生しにくくなる。
<Color filter manufacturing method>
The method for producing a color filter of the present invention includes a step of forming a first colored pixel on a support using a first colored curable composition, a first colored curable composition, and a first colored curable composition. A step of forming a second colored pixel adjacent to the colored pixel by photolithography, and a difference in refractive index between the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0. 10 or less.
The difference in refractive index between the first colored pixel and the second colored curable composition is the difference in refractive index between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel, and the first colored curable property. The difference in refractive index between the composition and the second colored curable composition is substantially the same.
FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a method for producing a color filter of the present invention. The color filter 1 includes a first colored pixel 2 and a second colored pixel 3 adjacent to the first colored pixel 2. By irradiating the colored curable composition 5 for forming the second colored pixel 3 with light through the mask 4 having the predetermined pattern, the second colored pixel having the predetermined pattern is formed.
According to the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the generation of a residue of the second colored curable composition when forming the color filter 1. The “residue of the second colored curable composition” means that the second colored curable composition is formed in addition to the desired portion. The reason why the generation of the residue of the second colored curable composition is suppressed is estimated as follows. By reducing the refractive index difference between the first colored curable composition for forming the first colored pixel 2 and the second colored curable composition for forming the second colored pixel, When the second colored pixel 3 is formed, the light irradiated through the mask 4 is not reflected on the surface of the first colored pixel 2 without being transmitted to the first colored pixel 2. The For this reason, by reducing the reflected light on the surface of the first colored pixel 2, it is possible to prevent the colored curable composition 5 other than the portion to be irradiated with light from being irradiated with light. be able to. And it can suppress that unnecessary hardening reaction arises in colored curable composition 5 with this reflected light. As a result, a residue of the colored curable composition 5 is less likely to be generated on the first colored pixel 2 and / or the second colored pixel 3 after the colored curable composition 5 is developed.
 以下、本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法の具体例について説明する。
<<<第1の着色画素を形成する工程>>>
 第1の着色画素を形成する工程では、ドライエッチングまたはフォトリソグラフィーで第1の着色画素を形成することができ、ドライエッチングにより第1の着色画素を形成することが好ましい。
<<<<ドライエッチングにより第1の着色画素を形成する場合>>>>
 カラーフィルタの製造方法においては、先ず、図3の概略断面図に示すように、第1の着色硬化性組成物によって第1の着色層11を形成する(工程(A))。
 第1の着色層11は、緑色透過層であることが好ましい。第1の着色層11を緑色透過層とすることにより、色感度をより向上させることができる。第1の着色硬化性組成物の詳細については、後述する。
Hereinafter, specific examples of the method for producing a color filter of the present invention will be described.
<<< Step of Forming First Colored Pixel >>>
In the step of forming the first colored pixel, the first colored pixel can be formed by dry etching or photolithography, and it is preferable to form the first colored pixel by dry etching.
<<<<< When Forming First Colored Pixel by Dry Etching >>>>
In the color filter manufacturing method, first, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 3, the first colored layer 11 is formed from the first colored curable composition (step (A)).
The first colored layer 11 is preferably a green transmission layer. By making the first colored layer 11 a green transmissive layer, color sensitivity can be further improved. Details of the first colored curable composition will be described later.
 第1の着色層11は、例えば、第1の着色硬化性組成物を支持体上に回転塗布、スリット塗布、スプレー塗布、スピンコート法、回転塗布、流延塗布、ロール塗布等の塗布方法により塗布し、乾燥させることにより形成できる。特に、スピンコート法により塗布することが好ましい。
 支持体としては、シリコン基板のほか、カラーフィルタに用いられるものであれば特に制限はない。支持体としては、例えば、液晶表示素子等に用いられるソーダガラス、ホウケイ酸ガラス、石英ガラスおよびこれらに透明導電膜を付着させたものや、固体撮像素子等に用いられる光電変換素子基板、例えば酸化膜、窒化シリコン等が挙げられる。また、これら支持体とカラーフィルタとの間には、本発明の効果を損なわない限りにおいて、中間層などを設けてもよい。
 乾燥後の第1の着色層11の厚みとしては、0.3~1μmの範囲が好ましく、0.35~0.8μmの範囲がより好ましく、0.35~0.7μmの範囲がさらに好ましい。
For example, the first colored layer 11 is formed by applying a first colored curable composition on a support by spin coating, slit coating, spray coating, spin coating, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, or the like. It can be formed by applying and drying. In particular, it is preferable to apply by spin coating.
The support is not particularly limited as long as it is used for a color filter in addition to a silicon substrate. Examples of the support include soda glass, borosilicate glass, quartz glass used for liquid crystal display elements and the like, and those obtained by attaching a transparent conductive film to these, and photoelectric conversion element substrates used for solid-state imaging elements, for example, oxidation Examples thereof include a film and silicon nitride. Further, an intermediate layer or the like may be provided between the support and the color filter as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
The thickness of the first colored layer 11 after drying is preferably in the range of 0.3 to 1 μm, more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.8 μm, and still more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.7 μm.
 第1の着色硬化性組成物が熱硬化性化合物を含有している場合、ホットプレート、オーブン等の加熱装置により、第1の着色層11を加熱して、硬化させることが好ましい。加熱温度は、90~250℃であることが好ましく、100~230℃であることがより好ましい。加熱時間は、加熱手段により異なるが、ホットプレート上で加熱する場合、通常3~30分間程度であり、オーブン中で加熱する場合、通常30~90分間程度である。 When the first colored curable composition contains a thermosetting compound, it is preferable that the first colored layer 11 is heated and cured by a heating device such as a hot plate or an oven. The heating temperature is preferably 90 to 250 ° C, more preferably 100 to 230 ° C. The heating time varies depending on the heating means, but is usually about 3 to 30 minutes when heated on a hot plate, and usually about 30 to 90 minutes when heated in an oven.
 次いで、第1の着色層11に除去部群120が形成されるようにドライエッチングによりパターニングする(工程(B))。これにより第1の着色パターン12を形成する。この手法によれば、第1の着色硬化性組成物により第1の着色層11を形成した後、この第1の着色層11を露光及び現像することによって除去部群120を設ける場合と比較して、所望の形状(特に矩形状)の除去部群120をより確実に形成することができる。 Next, patterning is performed by dry etching so that the removed portion group 120 is formed in the first colored layer 11 (step (B)). Thereby, the first colored pattern 12 is formed. According to this method, the first colored layer 11 is formed from the first colored curable composition, and then the first colored layer 11 is exposed and developed to provide the removal portion group 120 as compared with the case where the removed portion group 120 is provided. Thus, the removal portion group 120 having a desired shape (particularly rectangular shape) can be more reliably formed.
 ドライエッチングは、第1の着色層11を、パターニングされたフォトレジスト層51をマスクとしてエッチングガスを用いて行うことができる。例えば、図4の概略断面図に示すように、先ず、第1の着色層11の上にフォトレジスト層51を形成する。 Dry etching can be performed on the first colored layer 11 using an etching gas with the patterned photoresist layer 51 as a mask. For example, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 4, first, a photoresist layer 51 is formed on the first colored layer 11.
 具体的には、第1の着色層11上にポジ型またはネガ型の着色硬化性組成物(フォトレジスト)を塗布し、これを乾燥させることによりフォトレジスト層51を形成する。フォトレジスト層51の形成においては、更にプリベーク処理を施すことが好ましい。特に、フォトレジスト層51の形成プロセスとしては、露光後の加熱処理(PEB)、現像後の加熱処理(ポストベーク処理)を実施する形態が望ましい。 Specifically, a positive or negative colored curable composition (photoresist) is applied on the first colored layer 11 and dried to form the photoresist layer 51. In forming the photoresist layer 51, it is preferable to further perform a pre-bake treatment. In particular, as a process for forming the photoresist layer 51, it is desirable to perform a heat treatment after exposure (PEB) and a heat treatment after development (post-bake treatment).
 フォトレジストとしては、例えば、ポジ型の着色硬化性組成物が用いられる。このポジ型の着色硬化性組成物としては、紫外線(g線、h線、i線)、エキシマー・レーザー等を含む遠紫外線、電子線、イオンビームおよびX線等の放射線に感応するポジ型フォトレジスト用に好適なポジ型レジスト組成物が使用できる。放射線のうち、g線、h線、i線が好ましく、中でもi線が好ましい。
 ポジ型の着色硬化性組成物としては、具体的には、キノンジアジド化合物およびアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有する組成物が好ましい。キノンジアジド化合物としては、ナフトキノンジアジド化合物が挙げられる。
 乾燥後のフォトレジスト層51の厚みとしては、0.1~3μmが好ましく、0.2~2.5μmがより好ましく、0.3~2μmが更に好ましい。なお、フォトレジスト層51の塗布は、第1の着色層11における第1の着色硬化性組成物の塗布方法を用いて好適に行なえる。
As the photoresist, for example, a positive colored curable composition is used. As this positive type colored curable composition, positive type photo sensitive to radiation such as ultraviolet rays (g rays, h rays, i rays), deep ultraviolet rays including excimer lasers, electron beams, ion beams and X rays. A positive resist composition suitable for resist can be used. Of the radiation, g-line, h-line and i-line are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable.
Specifically, the positive colored curable composition is preferably a composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin. Examples of the quinonediazide compound include a naphthoquinonediazide compound.
The thickness of the photoresist layer 51 after drying is preferably from 0.1 to 3 μm, more preferably from 0.2 to 2.5 μm, still more preferably from 0.3 to 2 μm. In addition, the application of the photoresist layer 51 can be suitably performed by using a method for applying the first colored curable composition in the first colored layer 11.
 次いで、図5の概略断面図に示すように、フォトレジスト層51を露光及び現像することにより、レジスト除去部群51Aが設けられたレジストパターン(パターニングされたフォトレジスト層)52を形成する。
 レジストパターン52の形成は、特に制限なく、従来公知のフォトリソグラフィーの技術を用いることができる。露光及び現像により、フォトレジスト層51にレジスト除去部群51Aが設けられることによって、レジストパターン52が、第1の着色層11上に設けられる。レジストパターン52は、後続するエッチングに対してエッチングマスクとして機能する。
 フォトレジスト層51の露光は、所定のマスクパターンを介して、g線、h線、i線等、好ましくはi線で露光を施すことにより行なうことができる。露光後に、現像液で現像処理することにより、着色パターンを形成しようとする領域に合わせてフォトレジストが除去される。
 上記現像液としては、第1の着色層11には影響を与えず、ポジレジストの露光部およびネガレジストの未硬化部を溶解するものであればいずれも使用可能である。現像液としては、例えば、種々の有機溶剤の組み合わせやアルカリ性の水溶液を用いることができる。
 アルカリ性の水溶液としては、濃度が0.001~10質量%、好ましくは0.01~5質量%となるようにアルカリ性化合物を溶解して調製されたアルカリ性水溶液が好適である。アルカリ性化合物は、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム,硅酸ナトリウム、メタ硅酸ナトリウム、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリメチルベンジルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセン等が挙げられる。尚、アルカリ性水溶液を現像液として用いた場合は、一般に現像後に水で洗浄処理が施される。
Next, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 5, the photoresist layer 51 is exposed and developed to form a resist pattern (patterned photoresist layer) 52 provided with a resist removal group 51A.
The formation of the resist pattern 52 is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known photolithography technique can be used. The resist pattern 52 is provided on the first colored layer 11 by providing the resist removal portion group 51 </ b> A in the photoresist layer 51 by exposure and development. The resist pattern 52 functions as an etching mask for subsequent etching.
The exposure of the photoresist layer 51 can be performed by exposing with a g-line, h-line, i-line, etc., preferably i-line, through a predetermined mask pattern. After exposure, the photoresist is removed in accordance with the region where the colored pattern is to be formed by developing with a developer.
Any developer can be used as long as it does not affect the first colored layer 11 and dissolves the exposed portion of the positive resist and the uncured portion of the negative resist. As the developer, for example, a combination of various organic solvents or an alkaline aqueous solution can be used.
As the alkaline aqueous solution, an alkaline aqueous solution prepared by dissolving an alkaline compound so as to have a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass is suitable. Alkaline compounds include, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropyl Examples thereof include ammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, trimethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene and the like. In addition, when alkaline aqueous solution is used as a developing solution, generally a washing process is performed with water after development.
 次に、図6の概略断面図に示すように、第1の着色層11に除去部群120が形成されるように、レジストパターン52をエッチングマスクとしてドライエッチングによりパターニングする。これにより、第1の着色パターン12が形成される。 除去部群120は、第1の着色層11に市松状に設けられている。除去部群120は、複数の四角形状の空間である除去部を含み、各除去部が市松状に配置されている。第1の着色層11に除去部群120が設けられてなる第1の着色パターン12は、複数の四角形状の第1の着色画素を市松状に有している。第1の着色パターン12には、複数の第1の着色画素と複数の除去部とが市松状に形成されている。
 除去部群120は、第1の除去部群121と第2の除去部群122とを含む。第1の除去部群121と第2の除去部群122とは、市松状に形成された除去部群120に対して交互に配置されている。図6に示すように、例えばある断面でみた場合、第1の着色パターン12は、第1の着色画素、第1の除去部群121に含まれる除去部、第1の着色画素、第2の除去部群122に含まれる除去部、第1の着色層が、この順に配列されたパターンが繰り返される。
 ドライエッチングの代表的な例としては、特開昭59-126506号、特開昭59-46628号、同58-9108号、同58-2809号、同57-148706号、同61-41102号などの公報に記載の方法が挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
Next, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 6, patterning is performed by dry etching using the resist pattern 52 as an etching mask so that the removed portion group 120 is formed in the first colored layer 11. Thereby, the 1st coloring pattern 12 is formed. The removal unit group 120 is provided in a checkered pattern on the first colored layer 11. The removal unit group 120 includes a plurality of removal units that are rectangular spaces, and each removal unit is arranged in a checkered pattern. The first coloring pattern 12 in which the removal portion group 120 is provided in the first coloring layer 11 has a plurality of square-shaped first coloring pixels in a checkered pattern. In the first coloring pattern 12, a plurality of first coloring pixels and a plurality of removal portions are formed in a checkered pattern.
The removal unit group 120 includes a first removal unit group 121 and a second removal unit group 122. The first removal unit group 121 and the second removal unit group 122 are alternately arranged with respect to the removal unit group 120 formed in a checkered pattern. As shown in FIG. 6, for example, when viewed in a certain cross section, the first colored pattern 12 includes the first colored pixels, the removed portions included in the first removed portion group 121, the first colored pixels, A pattern in which the removal portion and the first colored layer included in the removal portion group 122 are arranged in this order is repeated.
Representative examples of dry etching include JP-A-59-126506, JP-A-59-46628, JP-A-58-9108, JP-A-58-2809, JP-A-57-148706, JP-A-61-41102, and the like. And the contents thereof are incorporated herein by reference.
 ドライエッチングとしては、パターン断面をより矩形に近く形成する観点や支持体へのダメージをより低減する観点から、以下の形態で行なうのが好ましい。
 フッ素系ガスと酸素ガス(O2)との混合ガスを用い、支持体が露出しない領域(深さ)までエッチングを行なう第1段階のエッチングと、この第1段階のエッチングの後に、窒素ガス(N2)と酸素ガス(O2)との混合ガスを用い、好ましくは支持体が露出する領域(深さ)付近までエッチングを行なう第2段階のエッチングと、支持体が露出した後に行なうオーバーエッチングとを含む形態が好ましい。以下、ドライエッチングの具体的手法、並びに第1段階のエッチング、第2段階のエッチング、およびオーバーエッチングについて説明する。
Dry etching is preferably performed in the following manner from the viewpoint of forming a pattern cross section closer to a rectangle and reducing damage to the support.
Using a mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas (O 2 ), the first stage etching is performed up to a region (depth) where the support is not exposed, and after this first stage etching, nitrogen gas ( N 2 ) and oxygen gas (O 2 ), and a second stage etching is preferably performed to the vicinity of the region (depth) where the support is exposed, and over-etching is performed after the support is exposed. The form containing these is preferable. Hereinafter, a specific method of dry etching and the first stage etching, second stage etching, and over-etching will be described.
 ドライエッチングは、下記手法により事前にエッチング条件を求めて行なう。
(1)第1段階のエッチングにおけるエッチングレート(nm/min)と、第2段階のエッチングにおけるエッチングレート(nm/min)とをそれぞれ算出する。
(2)第1段階のエッチングで所望の厚さをエッチングする時間と、第2段階のエッチングで所望の厚さをエッチングする時間とをそれぞれ算出する。
(3)上記(2)で算出したエッチング時間に従って第1段階のエッチングを実施する。(4)上記(2)で算出したエッチング時間に従って第2段階のエッチングを実施する。あるいはエンドポイント検出でエッチング時間を決定し、決定したエッチング時間に従って第2段階のエッチングを実施してもよい。
(5)上記(3)、(4)の合計時間に対してオーバーエッチング時間を算出し、オーバーエッチングを実施する。
Dry etching is performed by obtaining etching conditions in advance by the following method.
(1) The etching rate (nm / min) in the first stage etching and the etching rate (nm / min) in the second stage etching are calculated respectively.
(2) The time for etching the desired thickness in the first stage etching and the time for etching the desired thickness in the second stage etching are respectively calculated.
(3) The first stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above. (4) The second stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above. Alternatively, the etching time may be determined by endpoint detection, and the second stage etching may be performed according to the determined etching time.
(5) Overetching time is calculated with respect to the total time of (3) and (4) above, and overetching is performed.
 上記第1段階のエッチング工程で用いる混合ガスとしては、被エッチング膜である有機材料を矩形に加工する観点から、フッ素系ガスおよび酸素ガス(O2)を含むことが好ましい。また、第1段階のエッチング工程は、支持体が露出しない領域までエッチングする形態にすることで、支持体へのダメージを回避することができる。
 上記第2段階のエッチング工程および上記オーバーエッチング工程は、第1段階のエッチング工程でフッ素系ガスおよび酸素ガスの混合ガスにより支持体が露出しない領域までエッチングした後、支持体へのダメージ回避の観点から、窒素ガスおよび酸素ガスの混合ガスを用いてエッチング処理を行なうのが好ましい。
The mixed gas used in the first stage etching step preferably contains a fluorine-based gas and an oxygen gas (O 2 ) from the viewpoint of processing the organic material that is the film to be etched into a rectangular shape. In addition, the first step etching process can avoid damage to the support by etching to a region where the support is not exposed.
The second-stage etching process and the over-etching process are performed in the first-stage etching process after etching to a region where the support is not exposed by the mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas, and from the viewpoint of avoiding damage to the support. Therefore, it is preferable to perform the etching process using a mixed gas of nitrogen gas and oxygen gas.
 第1段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量と、第2段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量との比率は、第1段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング処理による矩形性を損なわないように決定することが重要である。なお、全エッチング量(第1段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量と第2段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量との総和)中における後者の比率は、0%より大きく50%以下である範囲が好ましく、10~20%がより好ましい。エッチング量とは、被エッチング膜の残存する膜厚とエッチング前の膜厚との差から算出される量のことをいう。 It is important to determine the ratio between the etching amount in the first stage etching process and the etching amount in the second stage etching process so as not to impair the rectangularity due to the etching process in the first stage etching process. It is. The latter ratio in the total etching amount (the sum of the etching amount in the first-stage etching process and the etching amount in the second-stage etching process) is preferably in the range of more than 0% and not more than 50%. 10 to 20% is more preferable. The etching amount is an amount calculated from the difference between the remaining film thickness to be etched and the film thickness before etching.
 また、エッチングは、オーバーエッチング処理を含むことが好ましい。オーバーエッチング処理は、オーバーエッチング比率を設定して行なうことが好ましい。また、オーバーエッチング比率は、初めに行なうエッチング処理時間より算出することが好ましい。オーバーエッチング比率は任意に設定できるが、フォトレジストのエッチング耐性と被エッチングパターンの矩形性維持の点で、エッチング工程におけるエッチング処理時間の30%以下であることが好ましく、5~25%であることがより好ましい。 Further, the etching preferably includes an over-etching process. The overetching process is preferably performed by setting an overetching ratio. Moreover, it is preferable to calculate the overetching ratio from the etching process time to be performed first. The over-etching ratio can be arbitrarily set, but it is preferably 30% or less of the etching processing time in the etching process, and preferably 5 to 25% from the viewpoint of etching resistance of the photoresist and maintaining the rectangularity of the pattern to be etched. Is more preferable.
 次いで、図7の概略断面図に示すように、エッチング後に残存するレジストパターン(エッチングマスク)52を除去する。レジストパターン52の除去は、レジストパターン52上に剥離液または溶剤を付与して、レジストパターン52を除去可能な状態にする工程と、レジストパターン52を洗浄水を用いて除去する工程とを含むことが好ましい。例えば、剥離液または溶剤を少なくともレジストパターン52上に付与し、所定の時間停滞させてパドル現像する工程を挙げることができる。剥離液または溶剤を停滞させる時間としては、特に制限はないが、数十秒から数分であることが好ましい。また、例えば、スプレー式またはシャワー式の噴射ノズルからレジストパターン52に洗浄水を噴射して、レジストパターン52を除去するようにしてもよい。
 洗浄水としては、純水を好ましく用いることができる。また、噴射ノズルとしては、その噴射範囲内に支持体全体が包含される噴射ノズルや、可動式の噴射ノズルであってその可動範囲が支持体全体を包含する噴射ノズルを挙げることができる。
Next, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 7, the resist pattern (etching mask) 52 remaining after the etching is removed. The removal of the resist pattern 52 includes a step of applying a stripping solution or a solvent to the resist pattern 52 so that the resist pattern 52 can be removed, and a step of removing the resist pattern 52 using cleaning water. Is preferred. For example, a step of applying a stripping solution or a solvent on at least the resist pattern 52 and stagnating for a predetermined time to perform paddle development can be included. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as time to make stripping solution or a solvent stagnant, It is preferable that it is several dozen seconds to several minutes. Further, for example, the resist pattern 52 may be removed by spraying cleaning water onto the resist pattern 52 from a spray type or shower type spray nozzle.
As the washing water, pure water can be preferably used. Further, examples of the injection nozzle include an injection nozzle in which the entire support is included in the injection range, and an injection nozzle that is a movable injection nozzle and in which the movable range includes the entire support.
<<<<フォトリソグラフィーにより第1の着色画素を形成する場合>>>>
 フォトリソグラフィーにより第1の着色画素を形成する場合、第1の着色硬化性組成物を用いて第1の着色層を形成し、第1の着色層に対し露光、現像を行うことが好ましい。
 第1の着色層の形成方法は、ドライエッチングにより第1の着色画素を形成する場合と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 露光に際して用いることができる放射線(光)としては、特に、g線、i線等の紫外線が好ましく(特に好ましくはi線)用いられる。照射量(露光量)は30~3000mJ/cm2が好ましく50~2500mJ/cm2がより好ましく、100~500mJ/cm2が特に好ましい。
 現像液としては、上述した第1の着色画素を形成する工程で説明した現像液を用いることができる。
 現像方法としては、例えば、現像液が満たされた槽中に基板を一定時間浸漬する方法(ディップ法)、基板表面に現像液を表面張力によって盛り上げて一定時間静止することで現像する方法(パドル法)、基板表面に現像液を噴霧する方法(スプレー法)、一定速度で回転している基板上に一定速度で現像液吐出ノズルをスキャンしながら現像液を吐出しつづける方法(ダイナミックディスペンス法)などを適用することができる。なかでも、特にパドル法が好ましい。
 現像時間は、未露光部の着色層が十分に溶解する時間であれば特に制限はなく、通常は10~300秒であり。好ましくは、20~120秒である。
 現像液の温度は0~50℃が好ましく、15~35℃が更に好ましい。
<<<<< When Forming First Colored Pixel by Photolithography >>>>
When the first colored pixel is formed by photolithography, it is preferable to form the first colored layer using the first colored curable composition, and to expose and develop the first colored layer.
The method for forming the first colored layer is synonymous with the case where the first colored pixel is formed by dry etching, and the preferred range is also the same.
As radiation (light) that can be used for exposure, ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line are particularly preferable (particularly preferably i-line). Irradiation dose (exposure dose) is more preferably 30 ~ 3000mJ / cm 2 is preferably 50 ~ 2500mJ / cm 2, particularly preferably 100 ~ 500mJ / cm 2.
As the developer, the developer described in the step of forming the first colored pixels described above can be used.
As a development method, for example, a method in which a substrate is immersed in a tank filled with a developer for a certain period of time (dip method), a method in which the developer is raised on the surface of the substrate by surface tension and is left stationary for a certain time (paddle) Method), a method of spraying the developer on the substrate surface (spray method), a method of continuously discharging the developer while scanning the developer discharge nozzle on the substrate rotating at a constant speed (dynamic dispensing method) Etc. can be applied. Of these, the paddle method is particularly preferable.
The development time is not particularly limited as long as the colored layer in the unexposed area is sufficiently dissolved, and is usually 10 to 300 seconds. Preferably, it is 20 to 120 seconds.
The temperature of the developer is preferably 0 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 35 ° C.
<<<第2の着色画素を形成する工程>>>
 第2の着色画素を形成する工程では、第2の着色硬化性組成物を用いて、第1の着色画素に隣接する第2の着色画素をフォトリソグラフィーにより形成する。フォトリソグラフィーを用いて第2の着色画素を形成することにより、全ての工程をドライエッチングで行う場合と比較して、工程数を削減することができる。
<<< Step of Forming Second Colored Pixel >>>
In the step of forming the second colored pixel, the second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel is formed by photolithography using the second colored curable composition. By forming the second colored pixel using photolithography, the number of steps can be reduced as compared with the case where all steps are performed by dry etching.
 第2の着色画素を形成する工程では、図8の概略断面図に示すように、第1の着色パターン12上に、第2の着色硬化性組成物を用いて第2の着色硬化性組成物21層を形成する。これに伴って、第1の除去部群121及び第2の除去部群122の除去部に第2の着色硬化性組成物が入り込み、この部分に第2の着色パターン22が形成される。
 具体的には、第1の除去部群121および第2の除去部群122における各除去部の内部に第2の着色硬化性組成物を埋設させるとともに、第1の着色画素(すなわち、第1の着色層11に除去部群120が形成されてなる第1の着色パターン12)上に第2の着色硬化性組成物により第2の着色硬化性組成物層21を積層する(工程(C))。これにより、第1の着色層11の除去部群120の中に、複数の第2の着色画素を有する第2の着色パターン22が形成される。ここで、第2の着色画素は、四角形状の画素となっていることが好ましい。第2着色硬化性組成物層21の形成は、上述した第1の着色層11を形成する方法と同様にして行える。
 ポストベーク後の第2の着色硬化性組成物層21の厚みとしては、0.1~1.5μmであることが好ましく、0.1~1.0μmであることがより好ましい。
In the step of forming the second colored pixel, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 8, the second colored curable composition is used on the first colored pattern 12 by using the second colored curable composition. 21 layers are formed. Along with this, the second colored curable composition enters the removed portions of the first removed portion group 121 and the second removed portion group 122, and the second colored pattern 22 is formed in this portion.
Specifically, the second colored curable composition is embedded in each of the removal portions in the first removal portion group 121 and the second removal portion group 122, and the first coloring pixel (that is, the first removal pixel group). The second colored curable composition layer 21 is laminated with the second colored curable composition on the first colored pattern 12) in which the removed portion group 120 is formed on the colored layer 11 (step (C)). ). Thereby, the 2nd coloring pattern 22 which has a some 2nd coloring pixel in the removal part group 120 of the 1st coloring layer 11 is formed. Here, the second colored pixel is preferably a square pixel. The second colored curable composition layer 21 can be formed in the same manner as the method for forming the first colored layer 11 described above.
The thickness of the second colored curable composition layer 21 after post-baking is preferably 0.1 to 1.5 μm, and more preferably 0.1 to 1.0 μm.
 そして、第2の着色硬化性組成物層21の、第1の除去部群121に対応する位置21Aを露光及び現像することによって、第2の着色硬化性組成物層21と、第2の除去部群122の各除去部の内部に設けられた複数の第2の着色画素22Rとを除去する(工程(D))(図9の概略断面図を参照)。これにより、第1の着色画素に隣接する第2の着色画素が形成される。
 露光に際して用いることができる放射線(光)としては、上述したフォトリソグラフィーにより第1の着色画素を形成する方法で説明した現像方法と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 現像液としては、上述した第1の着色画素を形成する工程で説明した現像液を用いることができる。
 現像方法としては、上述したフォトリソグラフィーにより第1の着色画素を形成する方法で説明した現像方法と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 現像時間は、未露光部の着色層が十分に溶解する時間であれば特に制限はなく、通常は10~300秒であり。好ましくは、20~120秒である。
 現像液の温度は0~50℃が好ましく、15~35℃が更に好ましい。
Then, by exposing and developing the position 21A corresponding to the first removal portion group 121 of the second colored curable composition layer 21, the second colored curable composition layer 21 and the second removal The plurality of second colored pixels 22 </ b> R provided inside each removal part of the part group 122 are removed (step (D)) (see the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 9). Thereby, the 2nd coloring pixel adjacent to the 1st coloring pixel is formed.
The radiation (light) that can be used for the exposure is the same as the development method described in the method for forming the first colored pixels by photolithography described above, and the preferable range is also the same.
As the developer, the developer described in the step of forming the first colored pixels described above can be used.
The developing method is synonymous with the developing method described in the method of forming the first colored pixel by photolithography described above, and the preferable range is also the same.
The development time is not particularly limited as long as the colored layer in the unexposed area is sufficiently dissolved, and is usually 10 to 300 seconds. Preferably, it is 20 to 120 seconds.
The temperature of the developer is preferably 0 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 35 ° C.
<<<第3の着色画素を形成する工程>>>
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法は、第2の着色画素を形成する工程の後に、第3の着色画素を形成する工程をさらに有していてもよい。
 第3の着色画素を形成する工程では、図10の概略断面図に示すように、第1の着色パターン12及び第2の着色パターン22上に、第3の着色硬化性組成物を用いて第3の着色硬化性組成物層31を形成する。これに伴って、第2の除去部群122の除去部に第3の着色硬化性組成物が入り込み、この部分に第3の着色パターン32が形成される。
 具体的には、第2の除去部群122における各除去部の内部に第3の着色硬化性組成物を埋設させるとともに、第1着色画素及び第2の着色画素(すなわち、第1の除去部群121の中に第2の着色パターン22が形成されてなる第1の着色パターン12)上に第3の着色硬化性組成物により第3の着色硬化性組成物層31を形成する(工程(E))。これにより、第1の着色層11の第2の除去部群122の中に、複数の第3の着色画素を有する第3の着色パターン32が形成される。ここで、第3の着色画素は、四角形状の画素となっていることが好ましい。第3の着色硬化性組成物層31の形成は、上述した第2の着色硬化性組成物層21を形成する工程と同様にして行なえる。
 ポストベーク後の第3の着色硬化性組成物層31の厚みとしては、0.1~1μmの範囲が好ましく、0.2~0.8の範囲がより好ましく、0.3~0.6μmの範囲がより好ましい。
<<< Step of Forming Third Colored Pixel >>>
The manufacturing method of the color filter of this invention may further have the process of forming a 3rd colored pixel after the process of forming a 2nd colored pixel.
In the step of forming the third colored pixel, the third colored curable composition is used on the first colored pattern 12 and the second colored pattern 22 as shown in the schematic sectional view of FIG. 3 colored curable composition layer 31 is formed. Along with this, the third colored curable composition enters the removed portion of the second removed portion group 122, and the third colored pattern 32 is formed in this portion.
Specifically, the third colored curable composition is embedded in each removal portion in the second removal portion group 122, and the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel (that is, the first removal portion). The third colored curable composition layer 31 is formed from the third colored curable composition on the first colored pattern 12 in which the second colored pattern 22 is formed in the group 121 (Step ( E)). Thereby, the 3rd coloring pattern 32 which has a some 3rd coloring pixel in the 2nd removal part group 122 of the 1st coloring layer 11 is formed. Here, the third colored pixel is preferably a square pixel. The formation of the third colored curable composition layer 31 can be performed in the same manner as the step of forming the second colored curable composition layer 21 described above.
The thickness of the third colored curable composition layer 31 after post-baking is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 1 μm, more preferably in the range of 0.2 to 0.8, and 0.3 to 0.6 μm. A range is more preferred.
 そして、第3の着色硬化性組成物層31の、第2の除去部群122に対応する位置31Aを露光及び現像することによって、第3の着色硬化性組成物層31を除去する。これにより、図11の概略断面図に示すように、第1の着色パターン12と、第2の着色パターン22と、第3の着色パターン32とを有するカラーフィルタ100が製造される(工程(F))。 Then, the third colored curable composition layer 31 is removed by exposing and developing the position 31A of the third colored curable composition layer 31 corresponding to the second removal portion group 122. As a result, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 11, the color filter 100 having the first colored pattern 12, the second colored pattern 22, and the third colored pattern 32 is manufactured (step (F) )).
<着色硬化性組成物>
 本発明で用いられる着色硬化性組成物は、第1の着色硬化性組成物または第2の着色硬化性組成物が無機粒子および高屈折樹脂の少なくとも一方を含み、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない第1の着色硬化性組成物、ならびに、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない第2の着色硬化性組成物のうち、屈折率が小さい方が無機粒子および高屈折樹脂の少なくとも一方を含むことが好ましい。「無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない状態の第1の(又は第2の)着色硬化性組成物」とは、第1の(又は第2の)着色性組成物を構成する組成物から無機粒子および高屈折樹脂が除かれた状態を示す。例えば、第1の(又は第2の)着色性組成物が、「無機粒子、着色剤、顔料分散液および硬化性化合物」からなる場合、「無機粒子を含まない第1の(又は第2の)着色硬化性組成物」は、「着色剤、顔料分散液および硬化性化合物」からなる組成物を意味する。第1の着色硬化性組成物および第2の着色硬化性組成物から無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を除いた場合の屈折率が小さい一方が、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂の少なくとも一方を含むことが好ましい。すなわち、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂は、第1の着色硬化性組成物および第2の着色硬化性組成物のうち、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方に含まれることが好ましい。特に、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない第1の着色硬化性組成物の方が、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない第2の着色硬化性組成物よりも屈折率が小さく、第1の着色硬化性組成物が無機粒子および高屈折樹脂の少なくとも一方を含むことが好ましい。
 また、第1の着色硬化性組成物および第2の着色硬化性組成物の少なくとも一方がフタロシアニン顔料を含むことが好ましい。特に、第1の着色硬化性組成物および第2の着色硬化性組成物のうち、第1の着色硬化性組成物および第2の着色硬化性組成物から、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を除いた着色硬化性組成物の屈折率が小さい方が、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂の少なくとも一方に加えて、フタロシアニン顔料を含むことが好ましい。
 以下、第1の着色硬化性組成物および第2の着色硬化性組成物について詳細に説明する。
 第1の着色硬化性組成物と第2の着色硬化性組成物の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差は、0.10以下であることが好ましく、0.06以下であることがより好ましく、0.02以下であることがさらに好ましく、0であることが特に好ましい。
<Colored curable composition>
In the colored curable composition used in the present invention, the first colored curable composition or the second colored curable composition contains at least one of inorganic particles and a high refractive resin, and contains inorganic particles and a high refractive resin. Of the first colored curable composition that does not contain, and the second colored curable composition that does not contain the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin, the one having a smaller refractive index contains at least one of the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin. Is preferred. The “first (or second) colored curable composition in a state not containing inorganic particles and a high refractive resin” is inorganic from the composition constituting the first (or second) colored composition. The state where the particles and the high refractive resin are removed is shown. For example, when the first (or second) coloring composition is composed of “inorganic particles, a colorant, a pigment dispersion, and a curable compound”, the “first (or second) containing no inorganic particles” is used. “Colored curable composition” means a composition comprising “colorant, pigment dispersion and curable compound”. It is preferable that one having a small refractive index when the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are removed from the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition contains at least one of the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin. . That is, the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are included in the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition having a smaller refractive index in a state where the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are not included. It is preferable. In particular, the first colored curable composition containing no inorganic particles and a high refractive resin has a smaller refractive index than the second colored curable composition containing no inorganic particles and a high refractive resin. The colored curable composition preferably contains at least one of inorganic particles and a highly refractive resin.
Moreover, it is preferable that at least one of the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition contains a phthalocyanine pigment. In particular, among the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition, inorganic particles and the high refractive resin were removed from the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition. The colored curable composition having a smaller refractive index preferably contains a phthalocyanine pigment in addition to at least one of the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin.
Hereinafter, the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition will be described in detail.
The difference in refractive index between the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition at a wavelength of 535 nm is preferably 0.10 or less, more preferably 0.06 or less, and It is more preferably 02 or less, and particularly preferably 0.
<<第1の着色硬化性組成物>>
 本実施形態においては、第1の着色硬化性組成物は、着色剤と、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂の少なくとも一方とを含む着色硬化性組成物であって、着色硬化性組成物の屈折率が、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率よりも0.05以上高い。第1の着色硬化性組成物は、ドライエッチングまたはフォトリソグラフィーによるパターン形成に用いることができ、ドライエッチングによるパターン形成に用いられるものが好ましい。
 第1の着色硬化性組成物がドライエッチングによるパターン形成に用いられる場合、第1の着色硬化性組成物は、着色剤と、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂の少なくとも一方と、硬化性化合物としての重合性化合物とを含むことが好ましい。さらに、溶剤、界面活性剤、顔料分散剤等を含んでいてもよい。
 第1の着色硬化性組成物がフォトリソグラフィーによるパターン形成に用いられる場合、第1の着色硬化性組成物は、着色剤と、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂の少なくとも一方と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂と、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤とを含むことが好ましい。さらに、溶剤、界面活性剤、顔料分散剤等を含んでいてもよい。
 また、第1の着色硬化性組成物は、緑色であることが好ましい。以下、第1の着色硬化性組成物の各成分について詳細に説明する。
<< first colored curable composition >>
In the present embodiment, the first colored curable composition is a colored curable composition containing a colorant and at least one of inorganic particles and a highly refractive resin, and the refractive index of the colored curable composition is Further, the refractive index is 0.05 or more higher than the refractive index in the state not containing inorganic particles and high refractive resin. The first colored curable composition can be used for pattern formation by dry etching or photolithography, and is preferably used for pattern formation by dry etching.
When the first colored curable composition is used for pattern formation by dry etching, the first colored curable composition comprises a colorant, at least one of inorganic particles and a high refractive resin, and polymerization as a curable compound. It is preferable to contain an ionic compound. Further, it may contain a solvent, a surfactant, a pigment dispersant and the like.
When the first colored curable composition is used for pattern formation by photolithography, the first colored curable composition includes a colorant, at least one of inorganic particles and a high refractive resin, an alkali-soluble resin, and a polymerization agent. It is preferable that an organic compound and a photoinitiator are included. Further, it may contain a solvent, a surfactant, a pigment dispersant and the like.
The first colored curable composition is preferably green. Hereinafter, each component of the first colored curable composition will be described in detail.
<<<無機粒子>>>
 本発明で用いる無機粒子は、例えば、波長500nmにおける屈折率が1.64以上であることが好ましく、1.80~3.0であることがより好ましく、1.80~2.80であることがさらに好ましい。
<<< Inorganic particles >>>
The inorganic particles used in the present invention preferably have a refractive index of 1.64 or more at a wavelength of 500 nm, more preferably 1.80 to 3.0, and 1.80 to 2.80. Is more preferable.
 無機粒子の1次粒子の重量平均径は、150nm以下であることが好ましく、100nm以下であることが更に好ましく、80nm以下であることが特に好ましい。無機粒子の1次粒子の下限値は、1nm以上であることが実際的である。
 着色画素中での無機粒子の重量平均径は、200nm以下であることが好ましく、150nm以下であることがより好ましく、100nm以下であることが更に好ましく、80nm以下であることが特に好ましい。下限は特にないが、1nm以上が好ましく、5nm以上がより好ましく、10nm以上がさらに好ましい。
 このように一次粒子の粒径範囲を着色画素中での粒径範囲と異なる範囲として規定したのは、着色画素中で一次粒子が凝集することを考慮したものである。なお、無機粒子を構成する物質の屈折率測定方法は日本工業規格(JIS K 0062:1992)に準ずる。
The weight average diameter of the primary particles of the inorganic particles is preferably 150 nm or less, more preferably 100 nm or less, and particularly preferably 80 nm or less. It is practical that the lower limit of the primary particles of the inorganic particles is 1 nm or more.
The weight average diameter of the inorganic particles in the colored pixel is preferably 200 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, still more preferably 100 nm or less, and particularly preferably 80 nm or less. Although there is no lower limit in particular, 1 nm or more is preferable, 5 nm or more is more preferable, and 10 nm or more is further more preferable.
The reason why the particle size range of the primary particles is defined as a range different from the particle size range in the colored pixel is that the primary particles are aggregated in the colored pixel. In addition, the refractive index measuring method of the substance which comprises inorganic particles is based on Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS K 0062: 1992).
 無機粒子の例としては、Ti、Zr、Sn、Sb、Cu、Fe、Mn、Pb、Cd、As、Cr、Hg、Zn、Al、Mg、Si、PおよびSから選択される少なくとも一種の元素を有する金属酸化物を含む粒子が挙げられる。具体的には、二酸化チタン(TiO2)、酸化錫、酸化インジウム、酸化亜鉛、または酸化ジルコニウム(ZrO2)の粒子が挙げられる。中でも、二酸化チタン、酸化錫、酸化インジウム、または酸化ジルコニウムの粒子が特に好ましく、二酸化チタンおよび酸化ジルコニウムの粒子がより好ましい。
 無機粒子は、これらの金属の酸化物を主成分とし、更に他の元素を含むことができる。主成分とは、粒子を構成する成分の中で最も含有量(質量%)が多い成分を意味する。他の元素の例としては、Ti、Zr、Sn、Sb、Cu、Fe、Mn、Pb、Cd、As、Cr、Hg、Zn、Al、Mg、Si、PおよびS等が挙げられる。二酸化チタンを主成分とする無機微粒子の結晶構造は、ルチル、ルチル/アナターゼの混晶、アナターゼ、アモルファス構造が主成分であることが好ましく、特にルチル構造が主成分であることが好ましい。
Examples of inorganic particles include at least one element selected from Ti, Zr, Sn, Sb, Cu, Fe, Mn, Pb, Cd, As, Cr, Hg, Zn, Al, Mg, Si, P, and S And particles containing a metal oxide having Specifically, particles of titanium dioxide (TiO 2 ), tin oxide, indium oxide, zinc oxide, or zirconium oxide (ZrO 2 ) can be given. Among these, particles of titanium dioxide, tin oxide, indium oxide, or zirconium oxide are particularly preferable, and particles of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide are more preferable.
The inorganic particles are mainly composed of oxides of these metals and can further contain other elements. The main component means a component having the largest content (mass%) among the components constituting the particles. Examples of other elements include Ti, Zr, Sn, Sb, Cu, Fe, Mn, Pb, Cd, As, Cr, Hg, Zn, Al, Mg, Si, P, and S. The crystal structure of the inorganic fine particles mainly composed of titanium dioxide is preferably a rutile, rutile / anatase mixed crystal, anatase or amorphous structure, and particularly preferably a rutile structure.
 無機粒子は表面処理されていることが好ましい。表面処理は、無機化合物または有機化合物を用いて実施することができる。表面処理に用いる無機化合物の例としては、アルミナ、シリカ、酸化ジルコニウムおよび酸化鉄が挙げられる。中でもアルミナおよびシリカが好ましい。表面処理に用いる有機化合物の例としては、ポリオール、アルカノールアミン、ステアリン酸、シランカップリング剤およびチタネートカップリング剤が挙げられる。 The inorganic particles are preferably surface-treated. The surface treatment can be performed using an inorganic compound or an organic compound. Examples of inorganic compounds used for the surface treatment include alumina, silica, zirconium oxide, and iron oxide. Of these, alumina and silica are preferable. Examples of the organic compound used for the surface treatment include polyols, alkanolamines, stearic acid, silane coupling agents, and titanate coupling agents.
 本発明の実施形態の一例として、二酸化チタンを主成分とする無機微粒子に、コバルト、アルミニウムおよびジルコニウムから選ばれる少なくとも1つの元素を含有するものが挙げられる。
 無機粒子は2種類以上の表面処理を組み合わせて処理されていてもよい。無機粒子の形状は、米粒状、球形状、立方体状、紡錘形状または不定形状であることが好ましい。
As an example of the embodiment of the present invention, an inorganic fine particle mainly composed of titanium dioxide contains at least one element selected from cobalt, aluminum, and zirconium.
The inorganic particles may be treated by combining two or more kinds of surface treatments. The shape of the inorganic particles is preferably a rice grain shape, a spherical shape, a cubic shape, a spindle shape, or an indefinite shape.
 無機粒子は、分散物組成物として、第1の着色硬化性組成物および/または第2の着色硬化性組成物に配合することが好ましい。この詳細は、例えば特開2007-277514号公報の記載を参酌できる。特に好ましくは、特開2007-277514号公報の実施例に記載の分散樹脂を用いて分散することが好ましい。 The inorganic particles are preferably blended into the first colored curable composition and / or the second colored curable composition as a dispersion composition. For details, for example, the description in JP-A-2007-277514 can be referred to. It is particularly preferable to disperse using the dispersion resin described in Examples of JP-A-2007-277514.
 第1の着色硬化性組成物中の無機粒子の含有量は、第1の着色硬化性組成物の屈折率が、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率よりも0.05以上高くなる量が好ましい。具体的には、第1の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、1.8質量部以上であることが好ましく、2.0質量部以上であることがより好ましい。上限としては、特に限定されないが、無機粒子の含有量が、第1の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、30質量部以下が好ましく、20質量部以下がより好ましく、10質量部以下がさらに好ましい。
 無機粒子は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合、合計量が上記含有量を満たすことが好ましい。
The content of the inorganic particles in the first colored curable composition is 0.05 or more than the refractive index when the refractive index of the first colored curable composition does not include the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin. Higher amounts are preferred. Specifically, it is preferably 1.8 parts by mass or more and more preferably 2.0 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. Although it does not specifically limit as an upper limit, 30 mass parts or less are preferable with respect to a total of 100 mass parts of total solid content of 1st colored curable composition, and, as for an upper limit, 20 mass parts or less are more preferable. 10 parts by mass or less is more preferable.
Only one type of inorganic particles may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that total amount satisfy | fills the said content.
<<<高屈折樹脂>>>
 高屈折樹脂は、例えば波長500nmにおける屈折率が1.60以上の樹脂をいい、上記屈折率が1.60~2.00であることが好ましく、1.65~2.00であることがより好ましい。
高屈折樹脂は、芳香環基を有する繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。芳香環基を有する繰り返し単位は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。芳香環基を有する繰り返し単位は、主鎖に芳香環基を有していてもよいし、側鎖に芳香環基を有していてもよい。
 芳香環基は、芳香族炭化水素基および芳香族複素環基のいずれであってもよいし、両方を含んでいてもよい。芳香環基は、単環であっても多環であってもよいが、多環が好ましく、縮合芳香環基がより好ましい。縮合芳香環基とは、2つ以上の芳香環構造を有する基であって、各々の環が2個以上の原子を共有する構造の基をいう。
 縮合芳香族炭化水素基としては、例えば、ナフチル基、アセナフチレニル基、アントリル基、フェナントリル基、ピレニル基、アセフェナントリレニル基、アセアントリレニル基、クリセニル基、ジベンゾクリセニル基、ベンゾアントリル基、ジベンゾアントリル基、ナフタセニル基、ピセニル基、ペンタセニル基、フルオレニル基、9,9-ジヒドロアントリル基、トリフェニレニル基、ペリレニル基、フルオランテニル基、ベンゾ[k]フルオランテニル基などが挙げられ、ナフチル基が好ましい。
 縮合芳香族複素環基としては、例えば、インドリル基、キノリル基、イソキノリル基、フタラジニル基、キノキサリニル基、キナゾリニル基、カルバゾリル基(3-カルバゾリル基、9-カルバゾリル基の両者を含む)、アクリジニル基、フェナジニル基、ベンゾフリル基、イソチアゾリル基、イソキサゾリル基、フラザニル基、フェノキサジニル基、ベンゾチアゾリル基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基、ベンズイミダゾリル基、ベンゾトリアゾリル基、ピラニル基などが挙げられ、カルバゾリル基、ベンゾチアゾリル基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基およびベンゾトリアゾリル基が好ましく、カルバゾリル基がより好ましい。
 単環の芳香環基を有する繰り返し単位の例としては、ビフェニル基を有する繰り返し単位、ポリチオフェン構造を有する繰り返し単位等が挙げられる。
<<< High Refractive Resin >>>>
The high refractive resin means, for example, a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more at a wavelength of 500 nm, and the refractive index is preferably 1.60 to 2.00, more preferably 1.65 to 2.00. preferable.
The highly refractive resin preferably has a repeating unit having an aromatic ring group. One type of repeating unit having an aromatic ring group may be used, or two or more types may be used. The repeating unit having an aromatic ring group may have an aromatic ring group in the main chain, or may have an aromatic ring group in the side chain.
The aromatic ring group may be either an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group, or may include both. The aromatic ring group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, but is preferably polycyclic and more preferably a condensed aromatic ring group. The condensed aromatic ring group is a group having two or more aromatic ring structures, and each ring has a structure sharing two or more atoms.
As the condensed aromatic hydrocarbon group, for example, naphthyl group, acenaphthylenyl group, anthryl group, phenanthryl group, pyrenyl group, acephenanthrenyl group, aceanthrylenyl group, chrysenyl group, dibenzochrysenyl group, benzoanthryl group Group, dibenzoanthryl group, naphthacenyl group, picenyl group, pentacenyl group, fluorenyl group, 9,9-dihydroanthryl group, triphenylenyl group, perylenyl group, fluoranthenyl group, benzo [k] fluoranthenyl group, etc. A naphthyl group is preferred.
Examples of the condensed aromatic heterocyclic group include indolyl group, quinolyl group, isoquinolyl group, phthalazinyl group, quinoxalinyl group, quinazolinyl group, carbazolyl group (including both 3-carbazolyl group and 9-carbazolyl group), acridinyl group, Examples include phenazinyl group, benzofuryl group, isothiazolyl group, isoxazolyl group, furazanyl group, phenoxazinyl group, benzothiazolyl group, benzoxazolyl group, benzimidazolyl group, benzotriazolyl group, pyranyl group, carbazolyl group, benzothiazolyl group, A benzoxazolyl group and a benzotriazolyl group are preferable, and a carbazolyl group is more preferable.
Examples of the repeating unit having a monocyclic aromatic ring group include a repeating unit having a biphenyl group and a repeating unit having a polythiophene structure.
 高屈折樹脂は、式(X)で表される繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。
式(X)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 式(X)中、R1は、水素原子又はアルキル基を表す。アルキル基としては、炭素数1~3個のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基が好ましい。
 式(X)中、L1は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、2価の脂肪族炭化水素基(好ましくは炭素数1~8)、2価の芳香族炭化水素基(好ましくは炭素数6~12)、-O-、-S-、-SO2-、-N(R)-(R:アルキル基)、-CO-、-NH-、-COO-、-CONH-、又はこれらを組み合わせた基(例えば、アルキレンオキシ基、アルキレンオキシカルボニル基、アルキレンカルボニルオキシ基など)などが挙げられる。
 2価の脂肪族炭化水素基(例えば、アルキレン基)としては、例えば、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、又はブチレン基などが挙げられる。
 2価の芳香族炭化水素基としては、例えば、フェニレン基、ナフチレン基などが挙げられる。
 以下に、L1の具体例を示すが、L1はこれらに限定されない。なお、*は結合位置を示す。
The highly refractive resin preferably has a repeating unit represented by the formula (X).
Formula (X)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
In formula (X), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. As the alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group is preferable.
In formula (X), L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group (preferably having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group (preferably having 6 to 12 carbon atoms), —O—, —S. —, —SO 2 —, —N (R) — (R: alkyl group), —CO—, —NH—, —COO—, —CONH—, or a combination thereof (eg, alkyleneoxy group, alkylene Oxycarbonyl group, alkylenecarbonyloxy group, etc.).
Examples of the divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group (for example, an alkylene group) include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, or a butylene group.
Examples of the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group include a phenylene group and a naphthylene group.
Hereinafter, specific examples of L 1, L 1 is not limited thereto. Note that * indicates a binding position.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式(X)中、Aは、芳香環基を表し、上述した芳香環基と同義である。
 式(X)中のAは、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基、アリール基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルチオキシ基、アリールチオキシ基、アシルオキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アミノ基、ホスフィノイル基、複素環基、シリルエーテル基、チオール基、スルホンアミド基、アミド基、ウレア基、チオウレア基、カルボキシル基、ウレタン基、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基等が挙げられる。
In formula (X), A represents an aromatic ring group and has the same meaning as the aromatic ring group described above.
A in formula (X) may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthioxy group, and an aryl group. Thioxy group, acyloxy group, alkylsulfanyl group, arylsulfanyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, acyloxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, amino group, phosphinoyl group, heterocyclic group Silyl ether group, thiol group, sulfonamide group, amide group, urea group, thiourea group, carboxyl group, urethane group, halogen atom, nitro group and the like.
 式(X)で表される繰り返し単位の含有量は、高屈折樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、40~95質量%が好ましく、60~90質量%がより好ましい。 The content of the repeating unit represented by the formula (X) is preferably 40 to 95% by mass, and more preferably 60 to 90% by mass with respect to all the repeating units in the high refractive resin.
 高屈折樹脂は、上述した芳香環基を有する繰り返し単位の他に、酸基を有する繰り返し単位をさらに有することが好ましい。酸基を有する繰り返し単位を有することにより、フォトリソグラフィー性能をより向上させることができる。
 酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシル基、活性メチレン基、リン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性水酸基、カルボン酸無水基等などが挙げられ、カルボキシル基が好ましい。これら酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。
The highly refractive resin preferably further has a repeating unit having an acid group in addition to the repeating unit having an aromatic ring group. By having a repeating unit having an acid group, the photolithography performance can be further improved.
Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, an active methylene group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a carboxylic acid anhydride group, and the like, and a carboxyl group is preferable. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 高屈折樹脂は、酸基を有する繰り返し単位として、式(Y)で表される繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。
式(Y)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 式(Y)中、R2は、水素原子又はアルキル基を表す。アルキル基としては、炭素数1~3個のアルキル基が好ましく、具体的には、メチル基などが挙げられる。
 式(Y)中、L2は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。L2で表される2価の連結基は、式(X)中のL1で表される2価の連結基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 式(Y)中、Bは、上述した酸基を表す。
 式(Y)で表される繰り返し単位の含有量は、高屈折樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、5~60質量%が好ましく、10~40質量%がより好ましい。
The high refractive resin preferably has a repeating unit represented by the formula (Y) as a repeating unit having an acid group.
Formula (Y)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
In the formula (Y), R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. The alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and specific examples include a methyl group.
In formula (Y), L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group represented by L 2 has the same meaning as the divalent linking group represented by L 1 in formula (X), and the preferred range is also the same.
In formula (Y), B represents the acid group described above.
The content of the repeating unit represented by the formula (Y) is preferably 5 to 60% by mass and more preferably 10 to 40% by mass with respect to all the repeating units in the high refractive resin.
 高屈折樹脂は、上述した芳香環基を有する繰り返し単位および酸基を有する繰り返し単位の他に、親水性基を有する繰り返し単位をさらに有することが好ましい。
 親水性基としては、例えば、ヒドロキシ基、アルキレンオキシド基、ピロリドン基、モルホリン基、1,3-ジケトン基、アミノ基、アンモニウム基などが挙げられ、ヒドロキシ基が好ましい。
 アルキレンオキシド基としては、下記式(W)で表される基が好ましい。下記式(W)中、*は結合位置を表す。
 式(W)  *-(A-O)n-R
 式(W)中、Aはアルキレン基(好ましくは、炭素数2または3のアルキレン基)を表し、Rは水素原子又はアルキル基(好ましくは、炭素数1または2のアルキル基)を表し、nは1以上の整数(好ましくは、1~25の整数)を表す。
 ピロリドン基、モルホリン基及び1,3-ジケトン基は、それぞれ以下の基を示す。なお、*は結合位置を表す。
The highly refractive resin preferably further has a repeating unit having a hydrophilic group in addition to the repeating unit having an aromatic ring group and the repeating unit having an acid group.
Examples of the hydrophilic group include a hydroxy group, an alkylene oxide group, a pyrrolidone group, a morpholine group, a 1,3-diketone group, an amino group, and an ammonium group, and a hydroxy group is preferable.
As the alkylene oxide group, a group represented by the following formula (W) is preferable. In the following formula (W), * represents a bonding position.
Formula (W) *-(AO) n -R
In the formula (W), A represents an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms), R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms), and n Represents an integer of 1 or more (preferably an integer of 1 to 25).
The pyrrolidone group, morpholine group and 1,3-diketone group each represent the following group. Note that * represents a bonding position.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 アミノ基は、1級、2級、及び3級のアミノ基を含む概念であり、以下式(P)で表される基が好ましい。
 式(P)  *-N(R)2
 式(P)中、Rは、それぞれ独立に水素原子またはアルキル基を表す。
The amino group is a concept including primary, secondary, and tertiary amino groups, and a group represented by the following formula (P) is preferable.
Formula (P) *-N (R) 2
In formula (P), R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group each independently.
 高屈折樹脂は、親水性基を有する繰り返し単位として、式(Z)で表される繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。
式(Z)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
The highly refractive resin preferably has a repeating unit represented by the formula (Z) as a repeating unit having a hydrophilic group.
Formula (Z)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 式(Z)中、R3は、水素原子又はアルキル基を表す。アルキル基は、式(X)中のR1で表されるアルキル基と同義である。
 L3は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。L3で表される2価の連結基は、式(X)中のL1で表される2価の連結基と同義である。
 Cは、上述した親水性基を表す。
 式(Z)で表される繰り返し単位の含有量は、高屈折樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、5~80質量%が好ましく、10~50質量%がより好ましい。
In formula (Z), R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. An alkyl group is synonymous with the alkyl group represented by R < 1 > in Formula (X).
L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group represented by L 3 has the same meaning as the divalent linking group represented by L 1 in formula (X).
C represents the hydrophilic group described above.
The content of the repeating unit represented by the formula (Z) is preferably 5 to 80% by mass and more preferably 10 to 50% by mass with respect to all the repeating units in the high refractive resin.
 高屈折樹脂は、例えば、公知のラジカル重合法により製造することができる。ラジカル重合法で高屈折樹脂を製造する際の温度、圧力、ラジカル開始剤の種類及びその量、溶剤の種類等々の重合条件は、当業者において容易に設定可能であり、実験的に条件を定めるようにすることもできる。
 上述した式(X)で表される繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を製造するためには、例えば、以下のモノマー(以後、モノマーaとも称する)を用いることができる。
The highly refractive resin can be produced, for example, by a known radical polymerization method. Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent, etc. when producing a high refractive resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and experimental conditions are determined. It can also be done.
In order to produce a resin containing a repeating unit represented by the above formula (X), for example, the following monomer (hereinafter also referred to as monomer a) can be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 上述した式(Y)で表される繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を製造するためには、例えば、以下のモノマー(以後、モノマーbとも称する)を用いることができる。 In order to produce a resin containing a repeating unit represented by the above formula (Y), for example, the following monomer (hereinafter also referred to as monomer b) can be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 上述した式(Z)で表される繰り返し単位を含む高屈折樹脂を製造するためには、例えば、以下のモノマー(以後、モノマーcとも称する)を用いることができる。 In order to produce a highly refractive resin containing a repeating unit represented by the above formula (Z), for example, the following monomer (hereinafter also referred to as monomer c) can be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 高屈折樹脂の具体例としては、下記表1及び2に記載の例示樹脂が挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。具体的に、上記モノマーaおよびモノマーbを表1に記載の質量比で用いて得られる例示樹脂1~64、および、上記モノマーa、モノマーbおよびモノマーcを表2に記載の質量比で用いて得られる例示樹脂65~118が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the high refractive resin include, but are not limited to, the exemplary resins described in Tables 1 and 2 below. Specifically, the exemplary resins 1 to 64 obtained by using the monomer a and the monomer b in the mass ratio described in Table 1 and the monomer a, the monomer b and the monomer c in the mass ratio described in Table 2 are used. Exemplified resins 65 to 118 obtained in this way are listed.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000010
 また、高屈折樹脂を製造する際には、上述したモノマーa、モノマーbおよびモノマーc以外の他のモノマーを併用してもよい。例えば、下記一般式(ED)で示される化合物および/または下記一般式(ED2)で表される化合物(以下これらの化合物を「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)由来の繰り返し単位を有する高屈折樹脂を用いてもよい。 Further, when producing a highly refractive resin, other monomers than the above-mentioned monomer a, monomer b and monomer c may be used in combination. For example, a compound having a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the following general formula (ED) and / or a compound represented by the following general formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimer”). A refractive resin may be used.
一般式(ED)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
General formula (ED)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 一般式(ED)中、R1及びR2は、それぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。
 R1及びR2で表される置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基は、アルコキシで置換されたアルキル基、ベンジル等のアリール基で置換されたアルキル基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、メチル基、エチル基、シクロヘキシル基、ベンジル基等のような酸や熱で脱離しにくい1級又は2級炭素の置換基が好ましい。
一般式(ED2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 一般式(ED2)中、Rは、水素原子または炭素数1~30の有機基を表す。一般式(ED2)の具体例としては、特開2010-168539号公報の記載を参酌できる。
 エーテルダイマーの具体例としては、特開2012-208494号の段落0565(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/235099号明細書の段落0694)に記載のエーテルダイマーの具体例が挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。特に、ジメチル-2,2'-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジエチル-2,2'-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジシクロヘキシル-2,2'-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジベンジル-2,2'-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエートが好ましい。エーテルダイマーは、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。
In general formula (ED), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
The hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 includes an alkyl group substituted with alkoxy, an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group such as benzyl, and the like. Can be mentioned. Among these, primary or secondary carbon substituents that are difficult to be removed by acid or heat, such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a benzyl group, are preferable.
General formula (ED2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
In general formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. As a specific example of the general formula (ED2), the description in JP 2010-168539 A can be referred to.
Specific examples of the ether dimer include specific examples of the ether dimer described in paragraph 0565 of JP2012-208494A (paragraph 0694 of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/235099). Is incorporated herein. In particular, dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dicyclohexyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis ( Methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dibenzyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate are preferred. Only one type of ether dimer may be used, or two or more types may be used.
 高屈折樹脂が酸基を有する場合、酸価は特に制限されないが、30~200mgKOH/gが好ましく、50~150mgKOH/gがより好ましく、100~150mgKOH/gがさらに好ましい。
 高屈折樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000以上が好ましく、5000以上がより好ましく、7000以上がさらに好ましい。上限値は、50000以下が好ましく、30000以下がより好ましく、20000以下がさらに好ましい。
When the highly refractive resin has an acid group, the acid value is not particularly limited, but is preferably 30 to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 50 to 150 mgKOH / g, and further preferably 100 to 150 mgKOH / g.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the high refractive resin is preferably 2000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more, and further preferably 7000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 50000 or less, more preferably 30000 or less, and even more preferably 20000 or less.
 第1の着色硬化性組成物中の高屈折樹脂の含有量は、第1の着色硬化性組成物の屈折率が、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率よりも0.05以上高くなる量が好ましい。具体的に、第1の着色硬化性組成物中の高屈折樹脂の含有量は、第1の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分中、1質量%以上が好ましく、2質量%以上がより好ましく、3質量%以上がさらに好ましい。
 高屈折樹脂は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合、合計量が上記含有量を満たすことが好ましい。
 また、第1の着色硬化性組成物中の高屈折樹脂と高屈折樹脂以外の他の樹脂との質量比は、50:50~100:0が好ましい。
 高屈折樹脂は、第1の画素に含まれる顔料や無機粒子の分散剤として用いることも可能である。
The content of the high refractive resin in the first colored curable composition is 0.05 more than the refractive index in the state where the refractive index of the first colored curable composition does not include the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin. Higher amounts are preferred. Specifically, the content of the high refractive resin in the first colored curable composition is preferably 1% by mass or more and more preferably 2% by mass or more in the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. 3 mass% or more is more preferable.
Only one type of high refractive resin may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that total amount satisfy | fills the said content.
The mass ratio of the high refractive resin in the first colored curable composition to a resin other than the high refractive resin is preferably 50:50 to 100: 0.
The highly refractive resin can also be used as a pigment or inorganic particle dispersant contained in the first pixel.
<<<着色剤>>>
 第1の着色硬化性組成物は、通常着色剤を含有する。着色剤としては、染料および/または顔料を用いることができ、顔料を用いることが好ましい。着色剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。
 第1の着色硬化性組成物に用いられる顔料としては、第1の着色硬化性組成物を緑色とするための顔料、例えば、C.I. Pigment Green 7,10,36,37,58から選択される1種以上、又は、これらの緑色顔料から選択される1種以上および、C.I.Pigment Yellow 1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214から選択される1種以上を用いることができる。
 第1の着色硬化性組成物に用いられる顔料としては、緑色顔料とともに黄色顔料を併用することが好ましい。緑色顔料は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料であるC.I. Pigment Green 36,58から選択される1種以上が好ましい。黄色顔料は、C.I.Pigment Yellow 139、150、185から選択される1種以上が好ましい。
 また、第1の着色硬化性組成物に用いられる顔料としては、第1の着色硬化性組成物を青色とするための顔料、例えば、C.I.Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:5,15:6,16,17:1,22,60,64,66,75,79,80から選択される1種以上、または、これらの青色顔料から選択される1種以上と、C.I.Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42から選択される1種以上を用いることが好ましい。青色顔料は、フタロシアニン顔料であるC.I.Pigment Blue 15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:5,15:6,16,17:1,75,79から選択される1種以上が好ましい。
 染料としては、例えば、特開昭64-90403号公報、特開昭64-91102号公報、特開平1-94301号公報、特開平6-11614号公報、特登2592207号、米国特許第4,808,501号明細書、米国特許第5,667,920号明細書、米国特許第5,059,500号明細書、特開平5-333207号公報、特開平6-35183号公報、特開平6-51115号公報、特開平6-194828号公報、特開平8-211599号公報、特開平4-249549号公報、特開平10-123316号公報、特開平11-302283号公報、特開平7-286107号公報、特開2001-4823号公報、特開平8-15522号公報、特開平8-29771号公報、特開平8-146215号公報、特開平11-343437号公報、特開平8-62416号公報、特開2002-14220号公報、特開2002-14221号公報、特開2002-14222号公報、特開2002-14223号公報、特開平8-302224号公報、特開平8-73758号公報、特開平8-179120号公報、特開平8-151531号公報等に記載の色素のうち、第1の着色硬化性組成物を緑色または青色とするための染料を用いることが好ましい。
 第1の着色硬化性組成物中の着色剤の含有量は、第1の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、1~20質量部であることが好ましく、5~10質量部であることがより好ましい。
<<< Colorant >>>
The first colored curable composition usually contains a colorant. As the colorant, a dye and / or a pigment can be used, and a pigment is preferably used. Only one colorant may be used, or two or more colorants may be used in combination.
Examples of the pigment used in the first colored curable composition include a pigment for making the first colored curable composition green, for example, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, or one or more selected from these green pigments, and C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 17 , It is possible to use at least one selected from 175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214.
As a pigment used in the first colored curable composition, it is preferable to use a yellow pigment in combination with a green pigment. The green pigment is C.I. which is a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment. I. One or more selected from Pigment Green 36 and 58 are preferred. The yellow pigment is C.I. I. One or more selected from Pigment Yellow 139, 150, and 185 are preferred.
Moreover, as a pigment used for a 1st colored curable composition, the pigment for making a 1st colored curable composition blue, for example, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 5, 15: 6, 16, 17: 1, 22, 60, 64, 66, 75, 79, One or more selected from 80 or one or more selected from these blue pigments; I. It is preferable to use one or more selected from Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42. The blue pigment is phthalocyanine pigment C.I. I. One or more selected from Pigment Blue 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 5, 15: 6, 16, 17: 1, 75, 79 are preferable.
Examples of the dye include, for example, JP-A No. 64-90403, JP-A No. 64-91102, JP-A No. 1-94301, JP-A No. 6-11614, No. 2592207, US Pat. No. 808,501, US Pat. No. 5,667,920, US Pat. No. 5,059,500, JP-A-5-333207, JP-A-6-35183, JP-A-6 -51115, JP-A-6-194828, JP-A-8-2111599, JP-A-4-249549, JP-A-10-123316, JP-A-11-302283, JP-A-7-286107. No. 1, JP-A 2001-4823, JP-A 8-15522, JP-A 8-29771, JP-A 8-146215, JP JP-A-1-343437, JP-A-8-62416, JP-A-2002-14220, JP-A-2002-14221, JP-A-2002-14222, JP-A-2002-14223, JP-A-8- Of the dyes described in JP-A-302224, JP-A-8-73758, JP-A-8-179120, JP-A-8-151531, etc., the first colored curable composition is made green or blue. It is preferable to use the dye.
The content of the colorant in the first colored curable composition is preferably 1 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. It is more preferable that it is 10 mass parts.
<<<顔料分散液>>>
 本発明の組成物の調製に顔料を用いる場合には、通常、顔料分散液として用いられる。顔料の分散性を向上させる観点から、さらに顔料分散剤を添加することが好ましい。顔料分散剤は、単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。
 顔料分散剤としては、高分子分散剤〔例えば、ポリアミドアミンとその塩、ポリカルボン酸とその塩、高分子量不飽和酸エステル、変性ポリウレタン、変性ポリエステル、変性ポリ(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリル系共重合体、ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン縮合物〕、および、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルリン酸エステル、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルアミン、アルカノールアミン、顔料誘導体等を挙げることができる。
 高分子分散剤は、その構造から更に直鎖状高分子、末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子に分類することができる。
 高分子分散剤は、顔料の表面に吸着し、再凝集を防止するように作用する。そのため、顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有する末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子が好ましい構造として挙げることができる。一方で、顔料誘導体は顔料表面を改質することで、高分子分散剤の吸着を促進させる効果を有する。
 本発明に用いうる顔料分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、BYKChemie社製「Disperbyk-101(ポリアミドアミン燐酸塩)、107(カルボン酸エステル)、110(酸基を含む共重合物)、130(ポリアミド)、161、162、163、164、165、166、170(高分子共重合物)」、「BYK-P104、P105(高分子量不飽和ポリカルボン酸)、EFKA社製「EFKA4047、4050~4010~4165(ポリウレタン系)、EFKA4330~4340(ブロック共重合体)、4400~4402(変性ポリアクリレート)、5010(ポリエステルアミド)、5765(高分子量ポリカルボン酸塩)、6220(脂肪酸ポリエステル)、6745(フタロシアニン誘導体)、6750(アゾ顔料誘導体)」、味の素ファンテクノ社製「アジスパーPB821、PB822」、共栄社化学社製「フローレンTG-710(ウレタンオリゴマー)」、「ポリフローNo.50E、No.300(アクリル系共重合体)」、楠本化成社製「ディスパロンKS-860、873SN、874、#2150(脂肪族多価カルボン酸)、#7004(ポリエーテルエステル)、DA-703-50、DA-705、DA-725」、花王社製「デモールRN、N(ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)、MS、C、SN-B(芳香族スルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)」、「ホモゲノールL-18(高分子ポリカルボン酸)」、「エマルゲン920、930、935、985(ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル)」、「アセタミン86(ステアリルアミンアセテート)」、ルーブリゾール社製「ソルスパース5000(フタロシアニン誘導体)、22000(アゾ顔料誘導体)、13240(ポリエステルアミン)、3000、17000、27000(末端部に機能部を有する高分子)、24000、28000、32000、38500(グラフト型高分子)」、日光ケミカル者製「ニッコールT106(ポリオキシエチレンソルビタンモノオレート)、MYS-IEX(ポリオキシエチレンモノステアレート)」等が挙げられる。また、特開2011-070156号公報の段落番号0028~0124に記載の分散剤や特開2007-277514号公報に記載の分散剤も好ましく用いられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 また、顔料分散剤は、酸基に由来するモノマーを含んでいるものが好ましい。顔料分散剤が酸基に由来するモノマーを含むことにより、フォトリソグラフィーにより着色画素を形成する際、着色画素の下地に発生する残渣をより低減することができる。酸基に由来するモノマーとしては、カルボキシル基を有するビニルモノマーやスルホン酸基を有するビニルモノマーが挙げられる。
 カルボキシル基を有するビニルモノマーとして、(メタ)アクリル酸、ビニル安息香酸、マレイン酸、マレイン酸モノアルキルエステル、フマル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、桂皮酸、アクリル酸ダイマーなどが挙げられる。また、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートなどの水酸基を有する単量体と無水マレイン酸、無水フタル酸、無水コハク酸、シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸無水物のような環状無水物との付加反応物、ω-カルボキシ-ポリカプロラクトンモノ(メタ)アクリレートなども利用できる。また、カルボキシル基の前駆体として無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸、無水シトラコン酸などの無水物含有モノマーを用いてもよい。なおこれらの内では、未露光部の現像除去性の観点から2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートなどの水酸基を有する単量体と無水マレイン酸、無水フタル酸、無水コハク酸、シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸無水物のような環状無水物との付加反応物が好ましい。
<<< Pigment dispersion >>>
When a pigment is used for preparing the composition of the present invention, it is usually used as a pigment dispersion. From the viewpoint of improving the dispersibility of the pigment, it is preferable to further add a pigment dispersant. A pigment dispersant may be used independently and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
Examples of the pigment dispersant include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight unsaturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic. -Based copolymers, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensates], and polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate esters, polyoxyethylene alkyl amines, alkanol amines, pigment derivatives, and the like.
The polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer from the structure thereof.
The polymer dispersant acts to adsorb on the surface of the pigment and prevent reaggregation. Therefore, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer and a block polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface can be mentioned as preferred structures. On the other hand, the pigment derivative has an effect of promoting the adsorption of the polymer dispersant by modifying the pigment surface.
The pigment dispersant that can be used in the present invention is also available as a commercial product. Specific examples of such a pigment dispersant include “Disperbyk-101 (polyamidoamine phosphate), 107 (carboxylic acid ester)”, 110 (manufactured by BYK Chemie). Copolymer containing acid groups), 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170 (polymer copolymer) "," BYK-P104, P105 (high molecular weight unsaturated polycarboxylic acid) ), EFKA 4047, 4050-4010-4165 (polyurethane type), EFKA 4330-4340 (block copolymer), 4400-4402 (modified polyacrylate), 5010 (polyesteramide), 5765 (high molecular weight polycarboxylic acid) Salt), 6220 (fatty acid polyester), 6745 Phthalocyanine derivatives), 6750 (azo pigment derivatives) ”,“ Ajisper PB821, PB822 ”manufactured by Ajinomoto Fan Techno,“ Floren TG-710 (urethane oligomer) ”manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co.,“ Polyflow No. 50E, No. 300 (acrylic) Type copolymer) ”,“ Disparon KS-860, 873SN, 874, # 2150 (aliphatic polycarboxylic acid), # 7004 (polyetherester), DA-703-50, DA-705, manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd. DA-725 ", Kao's" Demol RN, N (Naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin polycondensate), MS, C, SN-B (aromatic sulfonic acid formalin polycondensate) "," Homogenol L-18 (polymer) Polycarboxylic acid) "," Emulgen 920, 930, 935, 985 (polyoxyethylene) Nonylphenyl ether) ”,“ acetamine 86 (stearylamine acetate) ”,“ Solsperse 5000 (phthalocyanine derivative), 22000 (azo pigment derivative), 13240 (polyesteramine), 3000, 17000, 27000 (end part) Polymer having functional part), 24000, 28000, 32000, 38500 (graft type polymer) "," Nikkor T106 (polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate), MYS-IEX (polyoxyethylene monostearate) "manufactured by Nikko Chemicals Or the like. In addition, a dispersant described in paragraphs 0028 to 0124 of JP2011-070156A and a dispersant described in JP2007-277514A are preferably used, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
The pigment dispersant preferably contains a monomer derived from an acid group. When the pigment dispersant contains a monomer derived from an acid group, when a colored pixel is formed by photolithography, a residue generated on the base of the colored pixel can be further reduced. Examples of the monomer derived from an acid group include a vinyl monomer having a carboxyl group and a vinyl monomer having a sulfonic acid group.
Examples of the vinyl monomer having a carboxyl group include (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, cinnamic acid, and acrylic acid dimer. Further, an addition reaction product of a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate and a cyclic anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride, ω- Carboxy-polycaprolactone mono (meth) acrylate and the like can also be used. Moreover, you may use anhydride containing monomers, such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride, as a precursor of a carboxyl group. Of these, monomers having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate and maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride from the viewpoint of developing removability of unexposed areas. An addition reaction product with a cyclic anhydride such as
 また、スルホン酸基を有するビニルモノマーとして、2-アクリルアミド-2-メチルプロパンスルホン酸などが挙げられ、リン酸基を有するビニルモノマーとして、リン酸モノ(2-アクリロイルオキシエチルエステル)、リン酸モノ(1-メチル-2-アクリロイルオキシエチルエステル)などが挙げられる。等が好ましい。
 特に、顔料誘導体と高分子分散剤とを組み合わせて使用することが好ましい。
 本発明の組成物における顔料分散剤の含有量としては、着色剤である顔料100質量部に対して、1~80質量部であることが好ましく、5~70質量部がより好ましく、10~60質量部であることが更に好ましい。
Examples of the vinyl monomer having a sulfonic acid group include 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, and examples of the vinyl monomer having a phosphoric acid group include phosphoric acid mono (2-acryloyloxyethyl ester) and phosphoric acid mono (1-methyl-2-acryloyloxyethyl ester) and the like. Etc. are preferred.
In particular, it is preferable to use a combination of a pigment derivative and a polymer dispersant.
The content of the pigment dispersant in the composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 80 parts by weight, more preferably 5 to 70 parts by weight, with respect to 100 parts by weight of the pigment as the colorant. More preferably, it is part by mass.
<<<その他の成分>>>
 第1の着色硬化性組成物は、例えば、溶剤、硬化性化合物、界面活性剤、光重合開始剤、アルカリ可溶性樹脂等をさらに含んでいてもよい。
<<<<溶剤>>>>
 溶剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。例えば、溶剤としては、エステル類として、例えば、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、酢酸イソブチル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、オキシ酢酸アルキル(例:オキシ酢酸メチル、オキシ酢酸エチル、オキシ酢酸ブチル(例えば、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等))、3-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例:3-オキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-オキシプロピオン酸エチル等(例えば、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等))、2-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例:2-オキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-オキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-オキシプロピオン酸プロピル等(例えば、2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル))、2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチルおよび2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル(例えば、2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル等)、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル等、並びに、エーテル類として、例えば、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート等、並びに、ケトン類として、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン等、並びに、芳香族炭化水素類として、例えば、トルエン、キシレン等が挙げられる。
 溶剤の含有量は、第1の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分濃度が5~90質量%になる量とすることが好ましく、5~80質量%になる量とすることがより好ましい。
<<< Other ingredients >>>
The first colored curable composition may further contain, for example, a solvent, a curable compound, a surfactant, a photopolymerization initiator, an alkali-soluble resin, and the like.
<<<< solvent >>>>
Only one type of solvent may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. Examples of solvents include esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, and lactic acid. Ethyl, alkyl oxyacetate (eg, methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate)), 3-oxypropionic acid Alkyl esters (eg, methyl 3-oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate, etc. (eg, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate) etc)), -Oxypropionic acid alkyl esters (eg, methyl 2-oxypropionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate, etc. (eg, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2- Propyl methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate (for example, 2-methoxy-2 -Methyl methyl propionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate Etc., and ethers For example, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl Ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate and the like, and ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, and aromatic hydrocarbons When Examples thereof include toluene and xylene.
The content of the solvent is preferably such that the total solid concentration of the first colored curable composition is 5 to 90% by mass, and more preferably 5 to 80% by mass.
<<<<硬化性化合物>>>>
 硬化性化合物としては、加熱により膜硬化が進行するものが好ましく、例えば熱硬化性官能基を有する化合物を用いることができる。このような熱硬化性化合物としては、例えば、エポキシ基、メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基およびアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの基を有するものが好ましい。特に、エポキシ化合物が好ましく、多官能エポキシ化合物がより好ましい。また、硬化性化合物としては重合性化合物も好ましい。例えば、末端エチレン性不飽和結合を少なくとも1個、好ましくは2個以上有する重合性化合物が好ましい。
 具体例としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320;日本化薬株式会社製)ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬株式会社製)、エチレンオキシ変性ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート(市販品としてはA-DPH-12E;新中村化学株式会社製)およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール残基を介している構造が好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。また、KAYARAD DPCAシリーズ(DPCA-20、DPCA-30、DPCA-60、DPCA-120(以上、日本化薬株式会社製)、EHPE3150(ダイセル化学工業社製)等を用いることもできる。
 また、例えば、特開2012-208494号公報段落0466~0495(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の[0571]~[0606])の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 硬化性化合物は1種のみでもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。
 第1の着色硬化性組成物中の硬化性化合物の含有量は、第1の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、0.1~20質量部であることが好ましく、1~15質量部であることがより好ましい。
<<<<< Curable compound >>>>
As the curable compound, those in which film curing proceeds by heating are preferable, and for example, a compound having a thermosetting functional group can be used. As such a thermosetting compound, for example, a compound having at least one group selected from an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group is preferable. In particular, an epoxy compound is preferable, and a polyfunctional epoxy compound is more preferable. A polymerizable compound is also preferable as the curable compound. For example, a polymerizable compound having at least one, preferably two or more terminal ethylenically unsaturated bonds is preferred.
Specific examples include dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (KAYARAD D-320 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.). Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Ethyleneoxy-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (commercially available is A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) and a structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are via ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues are preferred. Yes. These oligomer types can also be used. Alternatively, KAYARAD DPCA series (DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, DPCA-120 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), etc. can be used.
In addition, for example, descriptions in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-208494, paragraphs 0466 to 0495 (corresponding to [0571] to [0606] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099) can be referred to, and the contents thereof are described in the present specification. Embedded in the book.
Only one type of curable compound may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination.
The content of the curable compound in the first colored curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass with respect to a total of 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. It is more preferably 1 to 15 parts by mass.
<<<<界面活性剤>>>>
 界面活性剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。特に、本発明の組成物は、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有することで、塗布液として調製したときの液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上することから、塗布厚の均一性や省液性をより改善することができる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素含有率が3~40質量%であることが好ましく、5~30質量%がより好ましく、7~25質量%が更に好ましい。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、組成物中における溶解性も良好である。
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、メガファックF-171、同F-172、同F-173、同F-176、同F-177、同F-141、同F-142、同F-143、同F-144、同R-30、同F-437、同F-475、同F-479、同F-482、同F-554、同F-780、同F-781、同F-781F(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、同FC431、同FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、同SC-101、同SC-103、同SC-104、同SC-105、同SC1068、同SC-381、同SC-383、同S393、同KH-40(以上、旭硝子(株)製)等が挙げられる。
 ノニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン並びにそれらのエトキシレート及びプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセリンエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル(BASF社製のプルロニックL10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2、テトロニック304、701、704、901、904、150R1、ソルスパース20000(日本ルーブリゾール(株)製)等が挙げられる。
 カチオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、フタロシアニン誘導体(商品名:EFKA-745、森下産業(株)製)、オルガノシロキサンポリマーKP341(信越化学工業(株)製)、(メタ)アクリル酸系(共)重合体ポリフローNo.75、No.90、No.95(共栄社化学(株)製)、W001(裕商(株)製)等が挙げられる。
 アニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、W004、W005、W017(裕商(株)社製)等が挙げられる。
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、トーレシリコーンDC3PA、トーレシリコーンSH7PA、トーレシリコーンDC11PA、トーレシリコーンSH21PA、トーレシリコーンSH28PA、トーレシリコーンSH29PA、トーレシリコーンSH30PA、トーレシリコーンSH8400(以上、東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)、TSF-4440、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、KP341、KF6001、KF6002(以上、信越シリコーン株式会社製)、BYK307、BYK323、BYK330(以上、ビックケミー社製)等が挙げられる。
 界面活性剤としては、例えば、特開2012-208494号公報段落0552~0556(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の[0678]~[0682])の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 第1の着色硬化性組成物中の界面活性剤の含有量は、第1の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、0.001~2質量部であることが好ましく、0.005~1質量部であることがより好ましい。
<<<<< Surfactant >>>>
Only one surfactant may be used, or two or more surfactants may be used in combination. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used. In particular, since the composition of the present invention contains a fluorosurfactant, the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved. Sex can be improved more.
The fluorine-containing surfactant preferably has a fluorine content of 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and still more preferably 7 to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in the composition.
Examples of the fluorosurfactant include Megafac F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, and F-143. F-144, R-30, F-437, F-475, F-479, F-482, F-554, F-780, F-781, F-781F (Above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC1068, SC-381, SC-383, S393, KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.) and the like.
Specific examples of nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerin ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1, Sol Perth 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Corporation), and the like.
Specific examples of the cationic surfactant include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
Specific examples of the anionic surfactant include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
Examples of silicone-based surfactants include Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torresilicone SH21PA, Torree Silicone SH28PA, Torree Silicone SH29PA, Torree Silicone SH30PA, Torree Silicone SH8400 (above, Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.) )), TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4442 (above, manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP341, KF6001, KF6002 (above, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) , BYK307, BYK323, BYK330 (above, manufactured by BYK Chemie) and the like.
As the surfactant, for example, description in paragraphs 0552 to 0556 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding to [0678] to [0682] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099) can be referred to. Is incorporated herein.
The content of the surfactant in the first colored curable composition is preferably 0.001 to 2 parts by mass with respect to a total of 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. 0.005 to 1 part by mass is more preferable.
<<<<光重合開始剤>>>>
 光重合開始剤は、後述する第2の着色硬化性組成物における光重合開始剤と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。光重合開始剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。
 第1の着色硬化性組成物が光重合開始剤を含有する場合、光重合開始剤の含有量は、第1の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、0.01~10質量部であることが好ましく、0.1~1質量部であることがより好ましい。
<<<<アルカリ可溶性樹脂>>>>
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、後述する第2の着色硬化性組成物におけるアルカリ可溶性樹脂と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。
 第1の着色硬化性組成物がアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有する場合、アルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量は、第1の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、0.1~20質量部であることが好ましく、1~15質量部であることがより好ましい。
<<<<< Photoinitiator >>>>
A photoinitiator is synonymous with the photoinitiator in the 2nd coloring curable composition mentioned later, and its preferable range is also the same. Only 1 type may be used for a photoinitiator and it may use 2 or more types together.
When the 1st colored curable composition contains a photoinitiator, content of a photoinitiator is 0.01 with respect to a total of 100 mass parts of total solid of a 1st colored curable composition. It is preferably ˜10 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 1 part by mass.
<<<<< Alkali-soluble resin >>>>
Alkali-soluble resin is synonymous with alkali-soluble resin in the 2nd coloring curable composition mentioned later, and its preferable range is also the same. Only 1 type may be used for alkali-soluble resin, and 2 or more types may be used together.
When the first colored curable composition contains an alkali-soluble resin, the content of the alkali-soluble resin is 0.1 to 20 with respect to a total of 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the first colored curable composition. The amount is preferably mass parts, more preferably 1 to 15 mass parts.
<<<第1の着色硬化性組成物の調製方法>>>
 第1の着色硬化性組成物は、上述の成分を混合することで調製される。
 なお、第1の着色硬化性組成物の調製に際しては、第1の着色硬化性組成物を構成する各成分を一括配合してもよいし、各成分を溶剤に溶解・分散した後に逐次配合してもよい。また、配合する際の投入順序や作業条件は特に制約を受けない。例えば、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解・分散して組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じては、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液・分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して組成物として調製してもよい。
 第1の着色硬化性組成物は、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、フィルタで濾過することが好ましい。従来からろ過用途等に用いられているものであれば特に限定されることなく用いることができる。例えば、PTFE(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン-6、ナイロン-6,6等のポリアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量を含む)等によるフィルタが挙げられる。これら素材の中でもポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含む)が好ましい。
 フィルタの孔径は、0.01μm以上が好ましく、0.05μm以上がより好ましい。また、フィルタの孔径は7.0μm以下が好ましく、3.0μm以下がより好ましく、2.5μm以下がさらに好ましく、2.0μm以下がよりさらに好ましく、0.5μm以下が特に好ましい。この範囲とすることにより、後工程において均一及び平滑な組成物の調製を阻害する、微細な異物を確実に除去することが可能となる。
 フィルタを使用する際、異なるフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。その際、第1のフィルタでのフィルタリングは、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上行ってもよい。
 また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径の第1のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。ここでの孔径は、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。市販のフィルタとしては、例えば、日本ポール株式会社、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)又は株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタの中から選択することができる。
 第2のフィルタは、上述した第1のフィルタと同様の材料等で形成されたものを使用することができる。
 例えば、第1のフィルタでのフィルタリングは、分散液のみで行い、他の成分を混合した後で、第2のフィルタリングを行ってもよい。
<<< Preparation Method of First Colored Curable Composition >>>
The first colored curable composition is prepared by mixing the above-described components.
In preparing the first colored curable composition, the components constituting the first colored curable composition may be combined at once, or the components may be combined sequentially after dissolving and dispersing each component in a solvent. May be. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on the charging order and working conditions when blending. For example, the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
The first colored curable composition is preferably filtered with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances and reducing defects. If it is conventionally used for the filtration use etc., it can use without being specifically limited. For example, fluorine resin such as PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), polyamide resin such as nylon-6 and nylon-6,6, polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (including high density and ultra high molecular weight), etc. Filter. Among these materials, polypropylene (including high density polypropylene) is preferable.
The pore size of the filter is preferably 0.01 μm or more, and more preferably 0.05 μm or more. The pore size of the filter is preferably 7.0 μm or less, more preferably 3.0 μm or less, further preferably 2.5 μm or less, still more preferably 2.0 μm or less, and particularly preferably 0.5 μm or less. By setting it as this range, it becomes possible to remove reliably the fine foreign material which inhibits preparation of a uniform and smooth composition in a post process.
When using filters, different filters may be combined. At that time, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more.
Moreover, you may combine the 1st filter of a different hole diameter within the range mentioned above. The pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer. As a commercially available filter, for example, it can be selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. .
As the second filter, a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
For example, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only with the dispersion, and the second filtering may be performed after mixing other components.
<<第2の着色硬化性組成物>>
 第2の着色硬化性組成物は、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない第1の着色硬化性組成物よりも屈折率が大きいことが好ましく、また、上述した無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を実質的に含有しないことが好ましい。また、第2の着色硬化性組成物は、少なくとも着色剤を含み、赤色または緑色であることが好ましい。また、第2の着色硬化性組成物は、さらに、アルカリ可溶性樹脂、重合性化合物、光重合開始剤、重合禁止剤、界面活性剤、溶剤、紫外線吸収剤等を含んでいてもよく、フォトリソグラフィーによるパターン形成に用いられることが好ましい。以下、第2の着色硬化性組成物の各成分について詳細に説明する。
<< second colored curable composition >>
The second colored curable composition preferably has a higher refractive index than the first colored curable composition containing no inorganic particles and a high refractive resin, and substantially contains the above-described inorganic particles and high refractive resin. It is preferable not to contain. The second colored curable composition preferably contains at least a colorant and is red or green. The second colored curable composition may further contain an alkali-soluble resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, a polymerization inhibitor, a surfactant, a solvent, an ultraviolet absorber, and the like. It is preferable to be used for pattern formation by. Hereinafter, each component of the second colored curable composition will be described in detail.
<<<着色剤>>>
 着色剤としては、染料および/または顔料を用いることができ、顔料を用いることが好ましい。着色剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。
 第2の着色硬化性組成物に用いられる顔料としては、例えば、C.I.Pigment
 Orange 2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73、および、C.I.Pigment Red 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,270,272,279から選択される1種以上、または、これらの顔料から選択される1種以上と、上述した第1の着色硬化性組成物で説明した黄色顔料から選択される1種以上を用いることができる。
 また、第2の着色硬化性組成物に用いられる顔料としては、第2の着色硬化性組成物を緑色とするための顔料、例えば、上述した第1の着色硬化性組成物を緑色とするための顔料を用いることができる。
 また、その他、例えば、C.I.Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42、および、C.I.Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:5,15:6,16,17:1,22,60,64,66,75,79,80から選択される1種以上を用いることもできる。
 染料としては、上述した第1の着色硬化性組成物で挙げた染料のうち、第2の着色硬化性組成物を赤色または緑色とするための染料を用いることが好ましい。
 第2の着色硬化性組成物中の着色剤の含有量は、第2の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、1~20質量部であることが好ましく、5~10質量部であることがより好ましい。
<<< Colorant >>>
As the colorant, a dye and / or a pigment can be used, and a pigment is preferably used. Only one colorant may be used, or two or more colorants may be used in combination.
Examples of the pigment used in the second colored curable composition include C.I. I. Pigment
Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, and , C.I. I. Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48: 4 49, 49: 1, 49: 2, 52: 1, 52: 2, 53: 1, 57: 1, 60: 1, 63: 1, 66, 67, 81: 1, 81: 2, 81: 3 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 270, 272, 279 Species , Or it may be used with one or more selected from these pigments, at least one selected from the yellow pigment described in the first colored curable composition described above.
Moreover, as a pigment used for the 2nd colored curable composition, the pigment for making the 2nd colored curable composition green, for example, for making the 1st colored curable composition mentioned above green These pigments can be used.
In addition, for example, C.I. I. Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, and C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 5, 15: 6, 16, 17: 1, 22, 60, 64, 66, 75, 79, One or more selected from 80 can also be used.
As the dye, it is preferable to use a dye for making the second colored curable composition red or green among the dyes mentioned in the first colored curable composition.
The content of the colorant in the second colored curable composition is preferably 1 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. It is more preferable that it is 10 mass parts.
<<<アルカリ可溶性樹脂>>>
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、例えば、線状有機高分子重合体であって、分子(好ましくは、アクリル系共重合体、スチレン系共重合体を主鎖とする分子)中に少なくとも1つのアルカリ可溶性を促進する基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂の中から適宜選択することができる。アルカリ可溶性樹脂は1種のみでもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。
 耐熱性の観点からは、ポリヒドロキシスチレン系樹脂、ポリシロキサン系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましく、現像性制御の観点からは、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましい。アルカリ可溶性を促進する基(酸基)としては、例えば、カルボキシル基、リン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性水酸基などが挙げられるが、有機溶剤に可溶で弱アルカリ水溶液により現像可能なものが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸が特に好ましいものとして挙げられる。これら酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。
<<< Alkali-soluble resin >>>
The alkali-soluble resin is, for example, a linear organic high molecular polymer having at least one alkali-soluble in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins having groups to promote. One kind of alkali-soluble resin may be used, or two or more kinds may be used in combination.
From the viewpoint of heat resistance, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acryl / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable. From the viewpoint of development control, acrylic resins and acrylamide resins are preferable. Resins and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred. Examples of the group (acid group) that promotes alkali solubility include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group, but those that are soluble in an organic solvent and can be developed with a weak alkaline aqueous solution. Preferably, (meth) acrylic acid is mentioned as a particularly preferable thing. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、下記式(X)で示されるエチレン性不飽和単量体に由来する構造単位を含んでいてもよい。
一般式(X)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 式(X)において、R1は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、R2は炭素数2~10のアルキレン基を表し、R3は、水素原子またはベンゼン環を含んでもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す。nは1~15の整数を表す。
 上記式(X)において、R2のアルキレン基の炭素数は、2~3であることが好ましい。また、R3のアルキル基の炭素数は1~20であるが、より好ましくは1~10であり、R3のアルキル基はベンゼン環を含んでもよい。R3で表されるベンゼン環を含むアルキル基としては、ベンジル基、2-フェニル(イソ)プロピル基等を挙げることができる。
The alkali-soluble resin may contain a structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer represented by the following formula (X).
Formula (X)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
In formula (X), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a benzene ring that may contain a benzene ring. Represents an alkyl group. n represents an integer of 1 to 15.
In the above formula (X), the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring. Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、例えば、特開2012-208494号公報段落0558~0575(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の[0685]~[0705])の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 第2の着色硬化性組成物中のアルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量は、第2の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、0.1~20質量部であることが好ましく、1~15質量部であることがより好ましい。
Examples of the alkali-soluble resin include paragraphs 0558 to 0575 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding to [0685] to [0705] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099). Is incorporated herein.
The content of the alkali-soluble resin in the second colored curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass with respect to a total of 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. It is more preferably 1 to 15 parts by mass.
<<<重合性化合物>>>
 重合性化合物は、上述した第1の着色硬化性組成物で用いられる重合性化合物と同義である。重合性化合物は1種のみでもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。
 第2の着色硬化性組成物中の重合性化合物の含有量は、第2の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、0.1~25質量部であることが好ましく、1~20質量部であることがより好ましい。
<<< polymerizable compound >>>
The polymerizable compound is synonymous with the polymerizable compound used in the first colored curable composition described above. Only one type of polymerizable compound may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination.
The content of the polymerizable compound in the second colored curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 25 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. 1 to 20 parts by mass is more preferable.
<<<光重合開始剤>>>
 光重合開始剤としては、上記重合成分の重合を開始する能力を有していれば特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。光重合開始剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。例えば、紫外線領域から可視の光線に対して感光性を有するものが好ましい。また、光励起された増感剤と何らかの作用を生じ、活性ラジカルを生成する活性剤であってもよく、モノマーの種類に応じてカチオン重合を開始させるような開始剤であってもよい。
 光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有するもの、オキサジアゾール骨格を有するもの、など)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノンなどが挙げられ、特に、オキシム化合物が好ましい。
 オキシム化合物としては、例えば、特開2012-208494号公報段落0513(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/235099号明細書の[0632])以降の式(OX-1)または(OX-2)で表される化合物の説明を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 オキシム化合物としては、TRONLY TR-PBG-304、TRONLY TR-PBG-309、TRONLY TR-PBG-305(常州強力電子新材料有限公司社(CHANGZHOU TRONLY NEW ELECTRONIC MATERIALS CO.,LTD)製)、アデカアークルズNCI-831、アデカアークルズNCI-930(ADEKA社製)などの市販品も使用できる。
 第2の着色硬化性組成物中の光重合開始剤の含有量は、第2の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、0.01~10質量部であることが好ましく、0.1~1質量部であることがより好ましい。
<<< Photoinitiator >>>
The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of the above polymerization components, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. Only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. For example, those having photosensitivity to visible light from the ultraviolet region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some action with a photoexcited sensitizer and generates an active radical, or may be an initiator that initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of monomer.
Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime derivatives. Oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenones, and the like, with oxime compounds being particularly preferred.
Examples of the oxime compound include those represented by the following formula (OX-1) or (OX-2) in paragraph 0513 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/235099, [0632]). Reference can be made to the description of the compounds represented, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
Examples of oxime compounds include TRONLY TR-PBG-304, TRONLY TR-PBG-309, TRONLY TR-PBG-305 (manufactured by CHANGZHOU TRONLY NEW ELECTRONIC MATERIALS CO., LTD. Arc), Commercial products such as Ruze NCI-831 and Adeka Arcles NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA) can also be used.
The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the second colored curable composition is 0.01 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. The amount is preferably 0.1 to 1 part by mass.
<<<重合禁止剤>>>
 重合禁止剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。例えば、重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、t-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン第一セリウム塩等が挙げられる。
 第2の着色硬化性組成物中の光重合開始剤の含有量は、第2の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、0.0001~0.1質量部であることが好ましい。
<<<界面活性剤および溶剤>>>
 第2の着色硬化性組成物に用いられる界面活性剤および溶剤は、上述した第1の着色硬化性組成物に用いられる界面活性剤および溶剤と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
<<< Polymerization inhibitor >>>
Only one type of polymerization inhibitor may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. For example, polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol ), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine primary cerium salt, and the like.
The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the second colored curable composition is 0.0001 to 0.1 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. It is preferable.
<<< Surfactant and Solvent >>>
The surfactant and solvent used in the second colored curable composition are the same as the surfactant and solvent used in the first colored curable composition described above, and the preferred range is also the same.
 <<<紫外線吸収剤>>>
 紫外線吸収剤しては、サリシレート系、ベンゾフェノン系、ベンゾトリアゾール系、置換アクリロニトリル系、トリアジン系の紫外線吸収剤等を使用することができる。市販品としては、UV-503(大東化学(株)社製)を使用可能である。
 紫外線吸収剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を併用してもよい。
 第2の着色硬化性組成物中の紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、第2の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分の合計100質量部に対し、0.01~1質量部であることが好ましい。
<<< Ultraviolet absorber >>>
As the ultraviolet absorber, salicylate-based, benzophenone-based, benzotriazole-based, substituted acrylonitrile-based, triazine-based ultraviolet absorbers and the like can be used. As a commercial product, UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd.) can be used.
Only one type of ultraviolet absorber may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination.
The content of the ultraviolet absorber in the second colored curable composition is preferably 0.01 to 1 part by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the total solid content of the second colored curable composition. .
 本発明は、第1の着色硬化性組成物と第2の着色硬化性組成物の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下である第1の着色硬化性組成物と第2の着色硬化性組成物を含む、カラーフィルタを製造するためのキットにも関する。このようなキットを用いることにより、カラーフィルタを形成する際の残渣の発生を抑制することができる。 The present invention relates to a first colored curable composition and a second colored curable composition in which the difference in refractive index between the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition at a wavelength of 535 nm is 0.10 or less. The present invention also relates to a kit for producing a color filter comprising a sex composition. By using such a kit, generation | occurrence | production of the residue at the time of forming a color filter can be suppressed.
<<その他の着色硬化性組成物の例>>
 本発明では、上述した第1の着色硬化性組成物および第2の着色硬化性組成物以外の他の着色硬化性組成物を用いてもよい。例えば、上述した第1の着色硬化性組成物の着色剤、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂、界面活性剤および溶剤と、上述した第2の着色硬化性組成物のアルカリ可溶性樹脂、光重合開始剤および重合禁止剤を含み、フォトリソグラフィーによるパターン形成に用いられるものを用いてもよい。
 また、上述した例では、第1の着色硬化性組成物は緑色、第2の着色硬化性組成物は赤色が好ましい形態として説明したがこれに限定されるものではない。例えば、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない第1の着色硬化性組成物の方が、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を含まない第2の着色硬化性組成物よりも屈折率が小さければ、他の色を適用することができる。
 また、上述した例では、第1の着色硬化性組成物と第2の着色硬化性組成物の屈折率差を調整するための手段として無機粒子および高屈折樹脂を例に挙げて説明したがこの例に限定されず、無機粒子および高屈折樹脂以外の手段を用いてもよい。
<< Examples of other colored curable compositions >>
In the present invention, other colored curable compositions other than the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition described above may be used. For example, the colorant, inorganic particles and highly refractive resin, surfactant and solvent of the first colored curable composition described above, the alkali-soluble resin of the second colored curable composition described above, a photopolymerization initiator, and You may use what contains a polymerization inhibitor and is used for pattern formation by photolithography.
Moreover, in the example mentioned above, although the 1st colored curable composition demonstrated green and the 2nd colored curable composition demonstrated red as a preferable form, it is not limited to this. For example, if the refractive index of the first colored curable composition containing no inorganic particles and high refractive resin is smaller than that of the second colored curable composition containing no inorganic particles and high refractive resin, Color can be applied.
Further, in the above-described example, the inorganic particles and the high refractive resin are described as examples as means for adjusting the refractive index difference between the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition. It is not limited to an example, You may use means other than an inorganic particle and highly refractive resin.
<固体撮像素子>
 本発明における固体撮像素子は、本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法で得られたカラーフィルタを備える。本発明における固体撮像素子の構成としては、固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタが備えられた構成であり、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はない。固体撮像素子としては、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
 支持体上に、固体撮像素子(CCDイメージセンサー、CMOSイメージセンサー、等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、上記フォトダイオードおよび上記転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口したタングステン等からなる遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、上記デバイス保護膜上に、本発明の固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタを有する構成である。
 更に、上記デバイス保護層上であってカラーフィルタの下(支持体に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。
 例として図12を参照して略説する。図12に示すように、固体撮像素子10は、シリコン基板上に設けられた受光素子(フォトダイオード)42、カラーフィルタ13、平坦化膜14、マイクロレンズ15等から構成される。平坦化膜14は必ずしも設ける必要はない。なお、図12では、各部を明確にするため、相互の厚みや幅の比率は無視して一部誇張して表示している。
<Solid-state imaging device>
The solid-state imaging device according to the present invention includes a color filter obtained by the color filter manufacturing method according to the present invention. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device in the present invention is a configuration provided with a color filter for a solid-state imaging device, and is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that functions as a solid-state imaging device. As a solid-state image sensor, the following structures are mentioned, for example.
A transfer electrode made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) is provided on a support, and the photodiode and the transfer electrode are provided on the support. A light-shielding film made of tungsten or the like having an opening only in the light-receiving portion of the photodiode, and a device protection film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light-shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light-shielding film and the photodiode light-receiving portion. It is the structure which has the color filter for solid-state image sensors of this invention on a device protective film.
Further, a configuration having a light condensing means (for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter) on the device protective layer and under the color filter (on the side close to the support), or a structure having the light condensing means on the color filter. Etc.
An example will be briefly described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, the solid-state imaging device 10 includes a light receiving element (photodiode) 42 provided on a silicon substrate, a color filter 13, a planarizing film 14, a microlens 15, and the like. The planarizing film 14 is not necessarily provided. In FIG. 12, in order to clarify each part, the ratios of the thicknesses and widths are ignored, and some parts are exaggerated.
 シリコン基板上には、Pウエル41を有し、このPウエルの表面の一部にフォトダイオード42を有している。シリコン基板のPウエル41の表面であって上記一部とは異なる領域には、フォトダイオード42よりN型不純物濃度の高い不純物拡散層43を有している。
 Pウエル41、フォトダイオード42、および不純物拡散層43上には、SiO2またはSiO2/SiN/SiO2等の絶縁膜47を有しており、この絶縁膜47上にはポリSi、タングステン、タングステンシリサイド、Al、Cu等からなる電極44が設けられている。電極44の上方には、配線層45が形成されている。配線層45の更に上方には、BPSG膜46、P-SiN膜48を有している。BPSG膜46上には、P-SiN膜48表面または画素領域以外の凹凸部を平坦化する目的で平坦化膜層49が形成されている。この平坦化膜層49上にカラーフィルタ13が形成されている。
A P well 41 is provided on the silicon substrate, and a photodiode 42 is provided on a part of the surface of the P well. An impurity diffusion layer 43 having an N-type impurity concentration higher than that of the photodiode 42 is provided on the surface of the P well 41 of the silicon substrate and in a region different from the above part.
An insulating film 47 such as SiO 2 or SiO 2 / SiN / SiO 2 is provided on the P well 41, the photodiode 42, and the impurity diffusion layer 43. On the insulating film 47, poly-Si, tungsten, An electrode 44 made of tungsten silicide, Al, Cu or the like is provided. A wiring layer 45 is formed above the electrode 44. Above the wiring layer 45, a BPSG film 46 and a P-SiN film 48 are provided. On the BPSG film 46, a planarizing film layer 49 is formed for the purpose of planarizing the surface of the P-SiN film 48 or uneven portions other than the pixel region. The color filter 13 is formed on the planarizing film layer 49.
 カラーフィルタ13は、2次元配列された複数の緑色画素20G、赤色画素20R、および青色画素20Bから構成されている。各着色画素20R,20G,20Bは、それぞれ受光素子42の上方位置に形成されている。緑色画素20Gが市松模様に形成されるとともに、青色画素20Bおよび赤色画素20Rは、各緑色画素20Gの間に形成されている。なお、図12では、カラーフィルタ13が3色の画素から構成されていることを説明するために、各着色画素20R,20G,20Bを1列に並べて表示している。
 平坦化膜14は、カラーフィルタ13の上面を覆うように形成されており、カラーフィルタ表面を平坦化している。
 マイクロレンズ15は、凸面を上にして配置された集光レンズであり、平坦化膜14(平坦化膜を有しない場合はカラーフィルタ)の上方でかつ受光素子42の上方に設けられている。各マイクロレンズ15は、被写体からの光を効率良く各受光素子42へ導く。
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、マイクロオーレッド方式(マイクロOLED)のディスプレイにも好ましく用いることができる。この画像表示方式については、例えば、「EL、PDP、LCDディスプレイ-技術と市場の最新動向-(東レリサーチセンター調査研究部門 2001年発行)」の43ページなどに記載されている。
The color filter 13 includes a plurality of green pixels 20G, red pixels 20R, and blue pixels 20B that are two-dimensionally arranged. Each of the colored pixels 20R, 20G, and 20B is formed above the light receiving element 42. The green pixels 20G are formed in a checkered pattern, and the blue pixels 20B and the red pixels 20R are formed between the green pixels 20G. In FIG. 12, the colored pixels 20R, 20G, and 20B are displayed in a line in order to explain that the color filter 13 is composed of pixels of three colors.
The planarization film 14 is formed so as to cover the upper surface of the color filter 13 and planarizes the color filter surface.
The microlens 15 is a condensing lens arranged with the convex surface facing upward, and is provided above the planarizing film 14 (or a color filter when no planarizing film is provided) and above the light receiving element 42. Each microlens 15 efficiently guides light from the subject to each light receiving element 42.
The color filter of the present invention can also be preferably used for a micro O red type (micro OLED) display. This image display method is described, for example, on page 43 of "EL, PDP, LCD display -Technology and latest trends in the market- (issued by Toray Research Center Research Division 2001)".
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「%」および「部」は質量基準である。 The present invention will be described more specifically with reference to the following examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Unless otherwise specified, “%” and “parts” are based on mass.
<顔料分散液の調製>
<<Red顔料分散液:ピグメントレッド(PR)254/ピグメントイエロー(PY)139を含有する分散液>>
 PR254を7.66部、PY139を3.44部、顔料分散剤BYK-161(BYK社製)を2.46部、樹脂アクリキュア-RD-F8(日本触媒)を4.94部、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート(以下、「PGMEA」と称する。)を81.50部混合した混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.3mm径)により3時間混合及び分散して、顔料分散液を調製した。その後さらに、この調製した顔料分散液に、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて、2000kg/cm3の圧力下で流量500g/minとして分散処理を行なった。
この分散処理を10回繰り返し、Red顔料分散液を得た。
<Preparation of pigment dispersion>
<< Red Pigment Dispersion: Dispersion Containing Pigment Red (PR) 254 / Pigment Yellow (PY) 139 >>
7.254 parts of PR254, 3.44 parts of PY139, 2.46 parts of pigment dispersant BYK-161 (manufactured by BYK), 4.94 parts of Resin Acrycure-RD-F8 (Nippon Catalyst), propylene glycol methyl A mixed liquid obtained by mixing 81.50 parts of ether acetate (hereinafter referred to as “PGMEA”) was mixed and dispersed by a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm diameter) for 3 hours to prepare a pigment dispersion. Thereafter, the prepared pigment dispersion was further subjected to a dispersion treatment at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a decompression mechanism. I did it.
This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Red pigment dispersion.
<<Green顔料分散液:ピグメントグリーン(PG)36/ピグメントイエロー(PY)150を含有する分散液>>
 PG36を7.80部、PY150を6.38部、下記式(A)で表される顔料分散剤を4.49部、樹脂アクリキュア-RD-F8(日本触媒)を1.50部、PGMEAを79.84部混合した混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.3mm径)により3時間混合及び分散して、顔料分散液を調製した。その後さらに、この調製した顔料分散液に、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて、2000kg/cm3の圧力下で流量500g/minとして分散処理を行なった。この分散処理を10回繰り返し、Green顔料分散液を得た。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式(A)において、k:l:m:n=25:40:5:30(重合モル比)、p=60、q=60、重量平均分子量は10,000である。
<< Green Pigment Dispersion: Dispersion Containing Pigment Green (PG) 36 / Pigment Yellow (PY) 150 >>
7.80 parts of PG36, 6.38 parts of PY150, 4.49 parts of a pigment dispersant represented by the following formula (A), 1.50 parts of Resin Acryure-RD-F8 (Nippon Shokubai), and PGMEA The mixed liquid of 79.84 parts was mixed and dispersed for 3 hours by a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm diameter) to prepare a pigment dispersion. Thereafter, the prepared pigment dispersion was further subjected to a dispersion treatment at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a decompression mechanism. I did it. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Green pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
In the formula (A), k: l: m: n = 25: 40: 5: 30 (polymerization molar ratio), p = 60, q = 60, and the weight average molecular weight is 10,000.
<<Green顔料分散液B>>
 上記Green顔料分散液において、式(A)で表される顔料分散剤を下記分散剤(B)に変更したこと以外は、同様にして、Green顔料分散液Bを得た。
分散剤(B):酸価=50mgKOH/g、Mw=24000
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 分散剤(B)の構造において、各構造単位に併記される数値(主鎖繰り返し単位に併記される数値)は、各構造単位の含有量(質量%)を表す。側鎖の繰り返し部位に併記される数値は、繰り返し部位の繰り返し数を示す。
<< Green Pigment Dispersion B >>
Green pigment dispersion B was obtained in the same manner as in the above Green pigment dispersion, except that the pigment dispersant represented by the formula (A) was changed to the following dispersant (B).
Dispersant (B): acid value = 50 mg KOH / g, Mw = 24000
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
In the structure of the dispersant (B), the numerical value written together with each structural unit (the numerical value written together with the main chain repeating unit) represents the content (% by mass) of each structural unit. The numerical value written together with the repeating part of the side chain indicates the number of repeating parts.
<<Blue顔料分散液:ピグメントブルー(PB)15:6/ピグメントバイオレット(PV)23を含有する分散液>>
 PB15:6を8.48部、PV23を3.81部、顔料分散剤BYK-161(BYK社製)を2.65部、樹脂アクリキュア-RD-F8(日本触媒)を2.65部、PGMEAを82.41部混合した混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.3mm径)により3時間混合及び分散して、顔料分散液を調製した。その後さらに、この調製した顔料分散液に、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて、2000kg/cm3の圧力下で流量500g/minとして分散処理を行なった。この分散処理を10回繰り返し、Blue顔料分散液を得た。
<< Blue pigment dispersion: Dispersion containing Pigment Blue (PB) 15: 6 / Pigment Violet (PV) 23 >>
8.48 parts of PB15: 6, 3.81 parts of PV23, 2.65 parts of pigment dispersant BYK-161 (manufactured by BYK), 2.65 parts of Resin Acrycure-RD-F8 (Japan Catalyst), PGMEA Was mixed and dispersed for 3 hours by a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm diameter) to prepare a pigment dispersion. Thereafter, the prepared pigment dispersion was further subjected to a dispersion treatment at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a decompression mechanism. I did it. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Blue pigment dispersion.
(無機粒子分散液:TiO2を含有する分散液)
 TTO-51(C)(石原産業)を18.17部、上記式(A)で表される顔料分散剤を4.91部、PGMEAを76.92部混合した混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.3mm径)により3時間混合及び分散した。その後さらに、この混合液に、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて、2000kg/cm3の圧力下で流量500g/minとして分散処理を行なった。この分散処理を10回繰り返し、無機粒子分散液を得た。
(Inorganic particle dispersion: Dispersion containing TiO 2 )
TTO-51 (C) (Ishihara Sangyo) was mixed with 18.17 parts, the pigment dispersant represented by the above formula (A) was mixed with 4.91 parts, and PGMEA was mixed with 76.92 parts. 0.3 mm diameter) and mixed and dispersed for 3 hours. Thereafter, the mixture was further subjected to dispersion treatment at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) equipped with a decompression mechanism. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain an inorganic particle dispersion.
<着色硬化性組成物の調製>
<<Red組成物1の調製>>
 下記表3に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Red組成物1を調製した。下記表3中の「Red顔料分散液」は上述したRed顔料分散液である。また、下記表3中、式(B)で表される樹脂は、以下の化合物である。
式(B)で表される樹脂:
<Preparation of colored curable composition>
<< Preparation of Red Composition 1 >>
The compounds shown in Table 3 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Red composition 1. The “Red pigment dispersion” in Table 3 below is the Red pigment dispersion described above. In Table 3 below, the resin represented by the formula (B) is the following compound.
Resin represented by formula (B):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 式(B)において、重量平均分子量は12,000である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
In the formula (B), the weight average molecular weight is 12,000.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000017
<着色硬化性組成物の調製>
<<Green組成物1(ドライエッチング用)の調製>>
 下記表4に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物1を調製した。下記表4中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000018
<Preparation of colored curable composition>
<< Preparation of Green Composition 1 (for dry etching) >>
The compounds shown in Table 4 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 1. “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 4 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000018
<<Green組成物2(ドライエッチング用)の調製>>
 下記表5に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物2を調製した。下記表5中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000019
<< Preparation of Green Composition 2 (for dry etching) >>
The compounds shown in Table 5 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 2. The “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 5 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000019
<<Green組成物3(ドライエッチング用)の調製>>
 下記表6に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物3を調製した。下記表6中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000020
<< Preparation of Green Composition 3 (for dry etching) >>
The compounds shown in Table 6 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 3. “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 6 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000020
<<Green組成物4(ドライエッチング用)の調製>>
 下記表7に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物4を調製した。下記表7中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000021
<< Preparation of Green Composition 4 (for dry etching) >>
The compounds shown in Table 7 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 4. “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 7 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000021
<<Green組成物5(ドライエッチング用)の調製>>
 下記表8に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物5を調製した。下記表8中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000022
<< Preparation of Green Composition 5 (for dry etching) >>
The compounds shown in Table 8 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 5. The “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 8 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000022
<<Green組成物6(ドライエッチング用)の調製>>
 下記表9に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物6を調製した。下記表9中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000023
<< Preparation of Green Composition 6 (for dry etching) >>
The compounds shown in Table 9 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 6. The “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 9 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000023
<<Green組成物7(ドライエッチング用)の調製>>
 下記表10に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物7を調製した。下記表10中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000024
<< Preparation of Green Composition 7 (for dry etching) >>
The compounds shown in Table 10 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 7. “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 10 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000024
<<Green組成物8(フォトリソグラフィー用)の調製>>
 下記表11に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物8を調製した。下記表11中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000025
<< Preparation of Green Composition 8 (for photolithography) >>
The compounds shown in Table 11 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 8. The “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 11 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000025
<<Green組成物9(フォトリソグラフィー用)の調製>>
 下記表12に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物9を調製した。下記表12中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000026
<< Preparation of Green Composition 9 (for photolithography) >>
The compounds shown in Table 12 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 9. “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 12 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000026
<<Green組成物10(フォトリソグラフィー用)の調製>>
 下記表13に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物10を調製した。下記表13中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
<< Preparation of Green Composition 10 (for photolithography) >>
The compounds shown in Table 13 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 10. “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 13 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
<<Green組成物11(フォトリソグラフィー用)の調製>>
 下記表14に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物11を調製した。下記表14中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
<< Preparation of Green Composition 11 (for photolithography) >>
The compounds shown in Table 14 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 11. “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 14 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
<<Green組成物12(フォトリソグラフィー用)の調製>>
 下記表15に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物12を調製した。下記表15中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
<< Preparation of Green Composition 12 (for photolithography) >>
The compounds shown in Table 15 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 12. “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 15 below is the above-described Green pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
<<Green組成物13(フォトリソグラフィー用)の調製>>
 下記表16に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物13を調製した。下記表16中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
<< Preparation of Green Composition 13 (for photolithography) >>
The compounds shown in Table 16 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 13. “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 16 below is the Green pigment dispersion described above.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
<<Green組成物14(ドライエッチング用)の調製>>
 下記表17に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物14を調製した。下記表17中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
<< Preparation of Green Composition 14 (for dry etching) >>
The compounds shown in Table 17 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 14. “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 17 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
<<Green組成物15(フォトリソグラフィー用)の調製>>
 下記表18に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物15を調製した。下記表18中の「Green顔料分散液」は上述したGreen顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
<< Preparation of Green Composition 15 (for photolithography) >>
The compounds shown in Table 18 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 15. “Green pigment dispersion” in Table 18 below is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
<<Green組成物16(フォトリソグラフィー用)の調製>>
 下記表19に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物16を調製した。下記表19中の「Green顔料分散液B」は上述したGreen顔料分散液Bである。開始剤Aは、特開2011-158655号公報の段落0162~0166に記載の特定化合物1の合成に倣い合成した。
開始剤A
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000034
<< Preparation of Green Composition 16 (for photolithography) >>
The compounds shown in Table 19 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 16. “Green pigment dispersion B” in the following Table 19 is the above-mentioned Green pigment dispersion B. Initiator A was synthesized following the synthesis of Specific Compound 1 described in paragraphs 0162 to 0166 of JP2011-158655A.
Initiator A
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000034
<<Green組成物17(フォトリソグラフィー用)の調製>>
 下記表20に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Green組成物17を調製した。下記表20中の「Green顔料分散液B」は上述したGreen顔料分散液Bである。開始剤Aは、上記開始剤Aである。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
<< Preparation of Green Composition 17 (for photolithography) >>
The compounds shown in Table 20 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Green composition 17. “Green pigment dispersion B” in Table 20 below is the Green pigment dispersion B described above. Initiator A is initiator A described above.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
<<Blue組成物1の調製>>
 下記表21に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Blue組成物1を調製した。下記表21中の「Blue顔料分散液」は上述したBlue顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
<< Preparation of Blue Composition 1 >>
The compounds shown in Table 21 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Blue Composition 1. The “Blue pigment dispersion” in Table 21 below is the above-described Blue pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
<<Blue組成物2の調製>>
 下記表22に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Blue組成物2を調製した。下記表22中の「Blue顔料分散液」は上述したBlue顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037
<< Preparation of Blue Composition 2 >>
The compounds shown in Table 22 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Blue composition 2. “Blue pigment dispersion” in Table 22 below is the above-described Blue pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037
<<Blue組成物3の調製>>
 下記表23に示す化合物を混合して溶解し、Blue組成物3を調製した。下記表23中の「Blue顔料分散液」は上述したBlue顔料分散液である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000038
<< Preparation of Blue Composition 3 >>
The compounds shown in Table 23 below were mixed and dissolved to prepare Blue composition 3. The “Blue pigment dispersion” in Table 23 below is the above-described Blue pigment dispersion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000038
<残渣評価>
<<実施例1>>
 上述したGreen組成物1を、製膜後の膜厚が0.7μmになるように、シリコンウェハ上にスピンコート法で塗布し、その後ホットプレート上で、100℃で2分間加熱した後に、220℃で5分間加熱して第1の着色硬化性組成物層を得た。次いで、第1の着色硬化性組成物層にドライエッチング法を用いることで、1.0μmの第1の着色画素を得た。
 次いで、第1の着色画素が形成されたシリコンウェハ上に、上述したRed組成物1を、製膜後の膜厚が0.7μmになるように、スピンコート法で塗布し、その後ホットプレート上で、100℃で2分間加熱して第2の着色硬化性組成物層を得た。次いで、得られた第2の着色硬化性組成物層に対し、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(Canon(株)製)を用い、1.0μmのドットパターンをマスクを介して露光した。次いで、露光後の第2の着色硬化性組成物層に対し、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.3%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピンシャワーにてリンスを行い、さらに純水にて水洗し、第1の着色画素に隣接する第2の着色画素を形成した。
 このときの第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEM(Scanning Electron Microscope)にて観察した。判定基準は以下の通りである。結果を以下の表24に示す。
A:残渣は見られない
B:第1の着色画素上に一部残渣が観察される
C:第1の着色画素上に残渣が一面に観察される
<<実施例2>>
 Green組成物1を、上述したGreen組成物2に変更したこと以外は、実施例1と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表24に示す。
<<実施例3>>
 Green組成物1を、上述したGreen組成物3に変更したこと以外は、実施例1と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表24に示す。
<<実施例4>>
 Green組成物1を、上述したGreen組成物4に変更したこと以外は、実施例1と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表24に示す。
<<実施例5>>
 Green組成物1を上述したBlue組成物1に変更し、Red組成物1を上述したGreen組成物13に変更したこと以外は、実施例1と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表25に示す。
<<実施例6>>
 Green組成物1を上述したBlue組成物2に変更し、Red組成物1を上述したGreen組成物13に変更したこと以外は、実施例1と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表25に示す。
<<比較例1>>
 Green組成物1を、上述したGreen組成物5に変更したこと以外は、実施例1と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表24に示す。
<<比較例2>>
 Green組成物1を、上述したGreen組成物6に変更したこと以外は、実施例1と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表24に示す。
<<比較例3>>
 Green組成物1を、上述したGreen組成物7に変更したこと以外は、実施例1と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表24に示す。
<<比較例4>>
 Green組成物1を上述したBlue組成物3に変更し、Red組成物1を上述したGreen組成物13に変更したこと以外は、実施例1と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表25に示す。
<Residue evaluation>
<< Example 1 >>
The above-mentioned Green composition 1 was applied onto a silicon wafer by spin coating so that the film thickness after film formation was 0.7 μm, and then heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes, and then 220 It heated at 5 degreeC for 5 minute (s), and obtained the 1st colored curable composition layer. Next, a first colored pixel of 1.0 μm was obtained by using a dry etching method for the first colored curable composition layer.
Next, the above-described Red composition 1 is applied on the silicon wafer on which the first colored pixels are formed by spin coating so that the film thickness after film formation becomes 0.7 μm, and then on the hot plate. Then, a second colored curable composition layer was obtained by heating at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Next, the obtained second colored curable composition layer was exposed to a 1.0 μm dot pattern through a mask using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.). Next, paddle development was performed for 60 seconds at 23 ° C. using a 0.3% aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) for the second colored curable composition layer after exposure. Thereafter, rinsing was performed with a spin shower, followed by washing with pure water to form a second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel.
The residue of the 2nd coloring curable composition layer remaining on the 1st coloring pixel at this time was observed with SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope). Judgment criteria are as follows. The results are shown in Table 24 below.
A: No residue is observed B: Partial residue is observed on the first colored pixel C: Residue is observed on the entire first colored pixel << Example 2 >>
The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed by SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 2 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
<< Example 3 >>
The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed by SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 3 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
<< Example 4 >>
The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 4 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
<< Example 5 >>
The second composition remaining on the first colored pixel is the same as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 is changed to the above-described Blue composition 1 and the Red composition 1 is changed to the above-described Green composition 13. The residue of the colored curable composition layer was observed with an SEM. The results are shown in Table 25 below.
<< Example 6 >>
The second composition remaining on the first colored pixel is the same as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 is changed to the above-described Blue composition 2 and the Red composition 1 is changed to the above-described Green composition 13. The residue of the colored curable composition layer was observed with an SEM. The results are shown in Table 25 below.
<< Comparative Example 1 >>
The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 5 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
<< Comparative Example 2 >>
The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed by SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 6 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
<< Comparative Example 3 >>
The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixel was observed by SEM in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 was changed to the Green composition 7 described above. . The results are shown in Table 24 below.
<< Comparative Example 4 >>
The second composition remaining on the first colored pixel is the same as in Example 1 except that the Green composition 1 is changed to the above-described Blue composition 3 and the Red composition 1 is changed to the above-described Green composition 13. The residue of the colored curable composition layer was observed with an SEM. The results are shown in Table 25 below.
<<実施例7>>
 Green組成物8を、製膜後の膜厚が0.7μmになるように、シリコンウェハ上にスピンコート法で塗布し、その後ホットプレート上で、100℃で2分間加熱して第1の着色硬化性組成物層を得た。次いで、得られた第1の着色硬化性組成物層に対し、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(Canon(株)製)を用い、1.0μmのドットパターンをマスクを介して露光した。次いで、露光後の第1の着色硬化性組成物層に対し、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.3%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピンシャワーにてリンスを行い、さらに純水にて水洗し、第1の着色画素を形成した。
 次いで、第1の着色画素が形成されたシリコンウェハ上に、上述したRed組成物1を、製膜後の膜厚が0.7μmになるように、スピンコート法で塗布し、その後ホットプレート上で、100℃で2分間加熱して第2の着色硬化性組成物層を得た。次いで、得られた第2の着色硬化性組成物層に対し、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(Canon(株)製)を用い、1.0μmのドットパターンをマスクを介して露光した。次いで、露光後の第2の着色硬化性組成物層に対し、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.3%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピンシャワーにてリンスを行い、さらに純水にて水洗し、第1の着色画素に隣接する第2の着色画素を形成した。
 このときの第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。判定基準は以下の通りである。結果を以下の表26に示す。
<<実施例8>>
 Green組成物8をGreen組成物9に変更したこと以外は、実施例7と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表26に示す。
<<実施例9>>
 Green組成物8をGreen組成物10に変更したこと以外は、実施例7と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表26に示す。
<<比較例5>>
 Green組成物8をGreen組成物11に変更したこと以外は、実施例7と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表26に示す。
<<比較例6>>
 Green組成物8をGreen組成物12に変更したこと以外は、実施例7と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表26に示す。
<<比較例7>>
 Green組成物8をGreen組成物13に変更したこと以外は、実施例7と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表26に示す。
<< Example 7 >>
The green composition 8 is applied on a silicon wafer by a spin coat method so that the film thickness after film formation becomes 0.7 μm, and then heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes on a hot plate for the first coloring. A curable composition layer was obtained. Next, the obtained first colored curable composition layer was exposed to a 1.0 μm dot pattern through a mask using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.). Next, paddle development was performed for 60 seconds at 23 ° C. using a 0.3% aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) for the first colored curable composition layer after exposure. Thereafter, rinsing was performed with a spin shower, followed by washing with pure water to form a first colored pixel.
Next, the above-described Red composition 1 is applied on the silicon wafer on which the first colored pixels are formed by spin coating so that the film thickness after film formation becomes 0.7 μm, and then on the hot plate. Then, a second colored curable composition layer was obtained by heating at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Next, the obtained second colored curable composition layer was exposed to a 1.0 μm dot pattern through a mask using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.). Next, paddle development was performed for 60 seconds at 23 ° C. using a 0.3% aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) for the second colored curable composition layer after exposure. Thereafter, rinsing was performed with a spin shower, followed by washing with pure water to form a second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel.
At this time, the residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixel was observed with an SEM. Judgment criteria are as follows. The results are shown in Table 26 below.
<< Example 8 >>
A residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Green composition 8 was changed to the Green composition 9. The results are shown in Table 26 below.
<< Example 9 >>
The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Green composition 8 was changed to the Green composition 10. The results are shown in Table 26 below.
<< Comparative Example 5 >>
The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Green composition 8 was changed to the Green composition 11. The results are shown in Table 26 below.
<< Comparative Example 6 >>
The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Green composition 8 was changed to the Green composition 12. The results are shown in Table 26 below.
<< Comparative Example 7 >>
A residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the first colored pixels was observed with an SEM in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Green composition 8 was changed to the Green composition 13. The results are shown in Table 26 below.
<<実施例10~14>>
 Green組成物1に用いたGreen顔料分散液中のPG36およびPY150を下記表27に示すGreen顔料種およびYellow顔料種に変更したこと以外は、実施例1と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表27に示す。
<<実施例15~19>>
 Green顔料分散液中のPG36およびPY150を下記表27に示すGreen顔料種およびYellow顔料種に変更したこと以外は、実施例7と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表27に示す。
<<比較例8~12>>
 Green顔料分散液中のPG36およびPY150を下記表27に示すGreen顔料種およびYellow顔料種に変更したこと以外は、比較例3と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表27に示す。
<<比較例13~17>>
 Green顔料分散液中のPG36およびPY150を下記表27に示すGreen顔料種およびYellow顔料種に変更したこと以外は、比較例7と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表27に示す。
<< Examples 10 to 14 >>
Except for changing PG36 and PY150 in the Green pigment dispersion used in Green Composition 1 to the Green pigment type and Yellow pigment type shown in Table 27 below, it remains on the first colored pixel as in Example 1. The residue of the 2nd coloring curable composition layer was observed in SEM. The results are shown in Table 27 below.
<< Examples 15 to 19 >>
The second colored curable composition remaining on the first colored pixel as in Example 7 except that PG36 and PY150 in the Green pigment dispersion were changed to the Green pigment type and Yellow pigment type shown in Table 27 below. The residue of the physical layer was observed with SEM. The results are shown in Table 27 below.
<< Comparative Examples 8 to 12 >>
The second colored curable composition remaining on the first colored pixel as in Comparative Example 3, except that PG36 and PY150 in the Green pigment dispersion were changed to the Green pigment type and Yellow pigment type shown in Table 27 below. The residue of the physical layer was observed with SEM. The results are shown in Table 27 below.
<< Comparative Examples 13 to 17 >>
The second colored curable composition remaining on the first colored pixel as in Comparative Example 7, except that PG36 and PY150 in the Green pigment dispersion were changed to the Green pigment type and Yellow pigment type shown in Table 27 below. The residue of the physical layer was observed with SEM. The results are shown in Table 27 below.
<<実施例20~23>>
 Green組成物1をGreen組成物14に変更し、高屈折樹脂として下記表28に示す例示樹脂を用いたこと以外は、実施例1と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表28に示す。なお、例示樹脂18、例示樹脂23、例示樹脂69および例示樹脂96は、上述した例示樹脂に対応する。
<<実施例23~27>>
 Green組成物8をGreen組成物15に変更し、高屈折樹脂として下記表28に示す例示樹脂を用いたこと以外は、実施例7と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表28に示す。
<<実施例28~32>>
 Green組成物9をGreen組成物16に変更し、Green顔料分散液中のPG36およびPY150を下記表29に示すGreen顔料種およびYellow顔料種に変更したこと以外は、実施例7と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表29に示す。
<<比較例18~22>>
 Green組成13をGreen組成物17に変更し、Green顔料分散液中のPG36およびPY150を下記表29に示すGreen顔料種およびYellow顔料種に変更したこと以外は、比較例7と同様に第1の着色画素上に残る第2の着色硬化性組成物層の残渣をSEMにて観察した。結果を以下の表29に示す。
 下記表24~29中における第1の着色画素および第2の着色画素の屈折率は、上述した第1の着色画素と第2の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率を、エリプソメータUVISEL/460-FUV-AGAS(堀場製作所製)を用いて測定した結果である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000044
<< Examples 20 to 23 >>
The second colored curing that remains on the first colored pixels is the same as in Example 1 except that the green composition 1 is changed to the green composition 14 and the exemplary resin shown in Table 28 below is used as the high refractive resin. The residue of the composition layer was observed with SEM. The results are shown in Table 28 below. The exemplary resin 18, the exemplary resin 23, the exemplary resin 69, and the exemplary resin 96 correspond to the exemplary resin described above.
<< Examples 23 to 27 >>
The second colored curing that remains on the first colored pixel is the same as in Example 7 except that the green composition 8 is changed to the green composition 15 and the exemplified resin shown in Table 28 below is used as the high refractive resin. The residue of the composition layer was observed with SEM. The results are shown in Table 28 below.
<< Examples 28 to 32 >>
The same as in Example 7, except that Green composition 9 was changed to Green composition 16, and PG36 and PY150 in the Green pigment dispersion were changed to the Green pigment species and Yellow pigment species shown in Table 29 below. The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the colored pixels was observed with an SEM. The results are shown in Table 29 below.
<< Comparative Examples 18-22 >>
The same as in Comparative Example 7, except that Green composition 13 was changed to Green composition 17, and PG36 and PY150 in the Green pigment dispersion were changed to the Green pigment species and Yellow pigment species shown in Table 29 below. The residue of the second colored curable composition layer remaining on the colored pixels was observed with an SEM. The results are shown in Table 29 below.
In Tables 24 to 29 below, the refractive indexes of the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel are the refractive indexes at the wavelength of 535 nm of the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel, and the ellipsometer UVISEL / 460-FUV. -Results of measurement using AGAS (Horiba Seisakusho).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000044
 上記表24~29から明らかなように、本発明によれば、カラーフィルタを形成する際の残渣の発生を抑制できることがわかった。
 表26~29から明らかなように、第1の着色画素をフォトリソグラフィーにより形成した場合も、第1の着色画素をドライエッチングにより形成した場合と同様の効果が得られた。
 表27及び29から明らかなように、Green顔料分散液中のPG36およびPY150を他の顔料に変更した場合も、PG36およびPY150を用いた場合と同様の効果が得られた。
 表28から明らかなように、無機粒子の代わりに高屈折樹脂を用いた場合も、無機粒子を用いた場合と同様の効果が得られた。
As is apparent from Tables 24 to 29, according to the present invention, it was found that the generation of a residue when forming a color filter can be suppressed.
As is apparent from Tables 26 to 29, when the first colored pixel was formed by photolithography, the same effect as that obtained when the first colored pixel was formed by dry etching was obtained.
As apparent from Tables 27 and 29, when PG36 and PY150 in the Green pigment dispersion were changed to other pigments, the same effect as that obtained when PG36 and PY150 were used was obtained.
As is clear from Table 28, the same effect as that obtained when inorganic particles were used was obtained when a highly refractive resin was used instead of inorganic particles.
2,201 第1の着色画素
3,202 第2の着色画素
4,203 マスク
5 第2の着色硬化性組成物
6 第3の着色画素
204 着色硬化性組成物
205 残渣
10 固体撮像素子
11 第1の着色層
12 第1の着色パターン
13,100,200 カラーフィルタ
14 平坦化膜
15 マイクロレンズ
20G 緑色画素(第1の着色画素)
20R 赤色画素(第2の着色画素)
20B 青色画素(第3の着色画素)
21 第2の着色硬化性組成物層
21A 第1の除去部群121に対応する位置
22 第2の着色パターン
22R 第2の除去部群122の各除去部の内部に設けられた複数の第2の着色画素
31 第3の着色硬化性組成物層
31A 第2の除去部群122に対応する位置
32 第3の着色パターン
41 Pウエル
42 受光素子(フォトダイオード)
43 不純物拡散層
44 電極
45 配線層
46 BPSG膜
47 絶縁膜
48 P-SiN膜
49 平坦化膜層
51 フォトレジスト層
51A レジスト除去部
52 レジストパターン(パターニングされたフォトレジスト層)
120 除去部群
121 第1の除去部群、122 第2の除去部群
2,201 First colored pixel 3,202 Second colored pixel 4,203 Mask 5 Second colored curable composition 6 Third colored pixel 204 Colored curable composition 205 Residue 10 Solid-state imaging device 11 First Colored layer 12 First colored pattern 13, 100, 200 Color filter 14 Flattened film 15 Micro lens 20G Green pixel (first colored pixel)
20R red pixel (second colored pixel)
20B Blue pixel (third colored pixel)
21 2nd coloring curable composition layer 21A The position 22 corresponding to the 1st removal part group 121 2nd coloring pattern 22R A plurality of 2nd provided in each removal part of the 2nd removal part group 122 Colored pixel 31 Third colored curable composition layer 31A Position 32 corresponding to second removal portion group 122 Third colored pattern 41 P well 42 Light receiving element (photodiode)
43 Impurity diffusion layer 44 Electrode 45 Wiring layer 46 BPSG film 47 Insulating film 48 P-SiN film 49 Planarizing film layer 51 Photoresist layer 51A Resist removal portion 52 Resist pattern (patterned photoresist layer)
120 removal part group 121 1st removal part group, 122 2nd removal part group

Claims (18)

  1.  支持体と、前記支持体上に形成された第1の着色画素と、前記第1の着色画素に隣接する第2の着色画素と、を有し、
     前記第1の着色画素と前記第2の着色画素の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下である、カラーフィルタ。
    A support, a first colored pixel formed on the support, and a second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel,
    A color filter, wherein a difference in refractive index at a wavelength of 535 nm between the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel is 0.10 or less.
  2.  前記第1の着色画素および前記第2の着色画素のうち少なくとも一方がフタロシアニン顔料を含む、請求項1に記載のカラーフィルタ。
    The color filter according to claim 1, wherein at least one of the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel includes a phthalocyanine pigment.
  3.  前記第1の着色画素または前記第2の着色画素が無機粒子および屈折率が1.60以上の樹脂の少なくとも一方を含み、
     前記無機粒子および前記樹脂は、前記第1の着色画素および前記第2の着色画素のうち、前記無機粒子および前記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方に含まれる、請求項1または2に記載のカラーフィルタ。
    The first colored pixel or the second colored pixel contains at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more,
    The said inorganic particle and said resin are contained in the one where the refractive index in the state which does not contain the said inorganic particle and the said resin is small among the said 1st coloring pixel and the said 2nd coloring pixel. The color filter described in 1.
  4.  前記第1の着色画素または前記第2の着色画素が無機粒子を含み、
     前記無機粒子は、前記第1の着色画素および前記第2の着色画素のうち、前記無機粒子および前記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方に含まれる、請求項1または2に記載のカラーフィルタ。
    The first colored pixel or the second colored pixel contains inorganic particles;
    The said inorganic particle is contained in the one where the refractive index in the state which does not contain the said inorganic particle and the said resin is small among the said 1st coloring pixel and the said 2nd coloring pixel. Color filter.
  5.  前記第1の着色画素および前記第2の着色画素のうち、前記無機粒子および前記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方にフタロシアニン顔料が含まれる、請求項3に記載のカラーフィルタ。
    4. The color filter according to claim 3, wherein a phthalocyanine pigment is contained in the first colored pixel and the second colored pixel that have a smaller refractive index in a state where the inorganic particles and the resin are not included. 5.
  6.  前記無機粒子として、二酸化チタンおよび酸化ジルコニウムのうち少なくともいずれか一方を含む、請求項3~5のいずれか1項に記載のカラーフィルタ。
    The color filter according to any one of claims 3 to 5, wherein the inorganic particles include at least one of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide.
  7.  支持体上に、第1の着色硬化性組成物を用いて第1の着色画素を形成する工程と、
     第2の着色硬化性組成物を用いて、前記第1の着色画素に隣接する第2の着色画素をフォトリソグラフィーにより形成する工程と、
     を有し、
     前記第1の着色硬化性組成物と前記第2の着色硬化性組成物との波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下である、カラーフィルタの製造方法。
    Forming a first colored pixel on the support using the first colored curable composition;
    Forming a second colored pixel adjacent to the first colored pixel by photolithography using a second colored curable composition;
    Have
    A method for producing a color filter, wherein a difference in refractive index at a wavelength of 535 nm between the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition is 0.10 or less.
  8.  前記第1の着色硬化性組成物および前記第2の着色硬化性組成物のうち少なくとも一方がフタロシアニン顔料を含む、請求項7に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
    The method for producing a color filter according to claim 7, wherein at least one of the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition contains a phthalocyanine pigment.
  9.  前記第1の着色硬化性組成物または前記第2の着色硬化性組成物が無機粒子および屈折率が1.60以上の樹脂の少なくとも一方を含み、
     前記無機粒子および前記樹脂は、前記第1の着色硬化性組成物および前記第2の着色硬化性組成物のうち、前記無機粒子および前記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方に含まれる、請求項7または8に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
    The first colored curable composition or the second colored curable composition contains at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more,
    The inorganic particles and the resin are included in the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition that have a smaller refractive index when the inorganic particles and the resin are not included. The manufacturing method of the color filter of Claim 7 or 8.
  10.  前記第1の着色硬化性組成物および前記第2の着色硬化性組成物のうち、前記無機粒子および前記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率が小さい方にフタロシアニン顔料が含まれる、請求項9に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
    The phthalocyanine pigment is included in the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition having a smaller refractive index in a state where the inorganic particles and the resin are not included. The manufacturing method of the color filter of description.
  11.  前記無機粒子が、二酸化チタンおよび酸化ジルコニウムのうち少なくともいずれか一方である、請求項9または10に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
    The method for producing a color filter according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the inorganic particles are at least one of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide.
  12.  前記第1の着色硬化性組成物が無機粒子および屈折率が1.60以上の樹脂の少なくとも一方を含み、かつ、
     前記無機粒子前記樹脂を含む状態の前記第1の着色硬化性組成物の屈折率が、前記無機粒子および前記樹脂を含まない状態の前記第1の着色硬化性組成物の屈折率よりも0.05以上高い、請求項7~11のいずれか1項に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
    The first colored curable composition contains at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more, and
    The refractive index of the first colored curable composition in a state containing the inorganic particles and the resin is less than the refractive index of the first colored curable composition in a state not containing the inorganic particles and the resin. The method for producing a color filter according to any one of claims 7 to 11, which is higher than 05.
  13.  請求項7~12のいずれか1項に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により得られたカラーフィルタ。
    A color filter obtained by the method for producing a color filter according to any one of claims 7 to 12.
  14.  請求項1~6及び13のいずれか1項に記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。
    A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to any one of claims 1 to 6 and 13.
  15.  請求項7~12のいずれか1項に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により得られたカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。
    A solid-state imaging device having a color filter obtained by the method for producing a color filter according to any one of claims 7 to 12.
  16.  着色剤と、無機粒子および屈折率が1.60以上の樹脂の少なくとも一方とを含む着色硬化性組成物であって、
     前記着色硬化性組成物の屈折率が、前記無機粒子および前記樹脂を含まない状態での屈折率よりも0.05以上高い、着色硬化性組成物。
    A colored curable composition comprising a colorant and at least one of inorganic particles and a resin having a refractive index of 1.60 or more,
    A colored curable composition, wherein a refractive index of the colored curable composition is 0.05 or more higher than a refractive index in a state where the inorganic particles and the resin are not included.
  17.  前記無機粒子として、二酸化チタンおよび酸化ジルコニウムのうち少なくともいずれか一方を含む、請求項16に記載の着色硬化性組成物。
    The colored curable composition according to claim 16, comprising at least one of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide as the inorganic particles.
  18.  第1の着色硬化性組成物と第2の着色硬化性組成物とを備え、
     前記第1の着色硬化性組成物と前記第2の着色硬化性組成物の波長535nmにおける屈折率の差が0.10以下である、カラーフィルタを製造するためのキット。
    A first colored curable composition and a second colored curable composition;
    A kit for producing a color filter, wherein a difference in refractive index at a wavelength of 535 nm between the first colored curable composition and the second colored curable composition is 0.10 or less.
PCT/JP2014/068565 2013-07-29 2014-07-11 Color filter, production method therefor, colored curable composition, solid state imaging element, and colored curable composition and kit WO2015016041A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020177030996A KR101949774B1 (en) 2013-07-29 2014-07-11 Color filter, production method therefor, colored curable composition, solid state imaging element, and colored curable composition and kit
KR1020157034956A KR20160005778A (en) 2013-07-29 2014-07-11 Color filter, production method therefor, colored curable composition, solid state imaging element, and colored curable composition and kit

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013156454 2013-07-29
JP2013-156454 2013-07-29
JP2014139552A JP6246086B2 (en) 2013-07-29 2014-07-07 Color filter, manufacturing method thereof, colored curable composition, solid-state imaging device, colored curable composition, and kit
JP2014-139552 2014-07-07

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015016041A1 true WO2015016041A1 (en) 2015-02-05

Family

ID=52431581

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/068565 WO2015016041A1 (en) 2013-07-29 2014-07-11 Color filter, production method therefor, colored curable composition, solid state imaging element, and colored curable composition and kit

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6246086B2 (en)
KR (2) KR101949774B1 (en)
TW (1) TWI604229B (en)
WO (1) WO2015016041A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPWO2017038708A1 (en) * 2015-08-31 2018-02-22 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored photosensitive composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and method for producing cured film

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6479519B2 (en) * 2015-03-19 2019-03-06 三菱電機株式会社 Photoelectric conversion element and manufacturing method thereof
KR102293495B1 (en) * 2019-12-11 2021-08-26 주식회사 유엔아이 Inorganic Oxide Nanoparticles And Pigment Dispersed Composition And Photoresist Composition for Image Sensor Containing The Same

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005101266A (en) * 2003-09-25 2005-04-14 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Solid state imaging device, method for manufacturing the same and camera
JP2005247904A (en) * 2004-03-01 2005-09-15 Sumitomo Bakelite Co Ltd Transparent composite material and display element, optical recording medium, and optical semiconductor package each using the same
JP2005283787A (en) * 2004-03-29 2005-10-13 Toray Ind Inc Color filter for liquid crystal display and liquid crystal display using the same
JP2008191201A (en) * 2007-02-01 2008-08-21 Toray Ind Inc Color filter for liquid crystal display, and liquid crystal display using it
JP2009258696A (en) * 2008-03-28 2009-11-05 Toray Ind Inc Color filter substrate and liquid crystal display device

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009014779A (en) * 2007-06-29 2009-01-22 Fujifilm Corp Lithographic printing plate precursor
CN101928489B (en) 2008-12-19 2012-07-11 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Pigment dispersion, pigment photoresist and color filter
JP5535692B2 (en) * 2009-03-17 2014-07-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored curable composition, color filter, and method for producing color filter
JP5562591B2 (en) 2009-07-31 2014-07-30 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored curable composition, color filter and method for producing the same
TWI507819B (en) * 2011-03-31 2015-11-11 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Colored composition and color filter using the same
JP2014026178A (en) * 2012-07-27 2014-02-06 Fujifilm Corp Near infrared absorbing composition, near infrared cut filter and manufacturing method therefor, and camera module and manufacturing method therefor

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005101266A (en) * 2003-09-25 2005-04-14 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Solid state imaging device, method for manufacturing the same and camera
JP2005247904A (en) * 2004-03-01 2005-09-15 Sumitomo Bakelite Co Ltd Transparent composite material and display element, optical recording medium, and optical semiconductor package each using the same
JP2005283787A (en) * 2004-03-29 2005-10-13 Toray Ind Inc Color filter for liquid crystal display and liquid crystal display using the same
JP2008191201A (en) * 2007-02-01 2008-08-21 Toray Ind Inc Color filter for liquid crystal display, and liquid crystal display using it
JP2009258696A (en) * 2008-03-28 2009-11-05 Toray Ind Inc Color filter substrate and liquid crystal display device

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPWO2017038708A1 (en) * 2015-08-31 2018-02-22 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored photosensitive composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and method for producing cured film

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR101949774B1 (en) 2019-02-21
KR20160005778A (en) 2016-01-15
JP2015045842A (en) 2015-03-12
KR20170123350A (en) 2017-11-07
TWI604229B (en) 2017-11-01
TW201504693A (en) 2015-02-01
JP6246086B2 (en) 2017-12-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7232881B2 (en) Colored photosensitive composition, cured film, pattern forming method, infrared light cut filter with light shielding film, solid-state imaging device, image display device and infrared sensor
TWI687489B (en) Near infrared absorbing pigment polymer, composition, film, optical filter, pattern forming method and device
TWI670332B (en) Colored composition, film, color filter, method for forming pattern, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state image sensor, and infrared sensor
JP6170673B2 (en) Composition for color filter, infrared transmission filter, method for producing the same, and infrared sensor
KR101808130B1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, pattern formation method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2015146804A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
TWI773679B (en) Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
TW201734642A (en) Photosensitive composition, color filter, method for forming pattern, solid state image sensor and image display device
WO2018021184A1 (en) Coloring composition, color filter, pattern formation method, solid-stage imaging element, and image display device
KR101851547B1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
JP7126537B2 (en) Coloring composition, method for producing coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
KR102002322B1 (en) Colored curable composition, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
JP6140661B2 (en) Photosensitive composition, dispersion composition, method for producing color filter using the same, color filter, and solid-state imaging device
WO2015019819A1 (en) Photosensitive coloring resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
TW201700625A (en) Curable composition, process for producing curable composition, film, infrared cut filter, infrared-transmitting filter, pattern formation method, and device
WO2016072259A1 (en) Colored curable composition, color filter, pattern formation method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
TW201833240A (en) Composition, film, infrared cut-off filter, solid-state imaging element, infrared sensor, camera module, and new compound
JP6246086B2 (en) Color filter, manufacturing method thereof, colored curable composition, solid-state imaging device, colored curable composition, and kit
TW201823859A (en) Pattern manufacturing method, color filter manufacturing method, method of manufacturing sold state imaging element, and method of manufacturing image display device
JP2017116955A (en) Composition for infrared transmission filter, infrared transmission filter, manufacturing method of infrared transmission filter, and infrared sensor
JP2018120248A (en) Composition for infrared transmission filter, infrared transmission filter, manufacturing method of infrared transmission filter, and infrared sensor

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14831326

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20157034956

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14831326

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1